new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/runtime/doc/options.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6826 @@
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 08
+
+
+		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+Options							*options*
+
+1. Setting options			|set-option|
+2. Automatically setting options	|auto-setting|
+3. Options summary			|option-summary|
+
+For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|.
+
+Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
+achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
+	boolean		can only be on or off		*boolean* *toggle*
+	number		has a numeric value
+	string		has a string value
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Setting options					*set-option*
+
+							*:se* *:set*
+:se[t]			Show all options that differ from their default value.
+
+:se[t] all		Show all but terminal options.
+
+:se[t] termcap		Show all terminal options.  Note that in the GUI the
+			key codes are not shown, because they are generated
+			internally and can't be changed.  Changing the terminal
+			codes in the GUI is not useful either...
+
+								*E518* *E519*
+:se[t] {option}?	Show value of {option}.
+
+:se[t] {option}		Toggle option: set, switch it on.
+			Number option: show value.
+			String option: show value.
+
+:se[t] no{option}	Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.
+
+:se[t] {option}!   or
+:se[t] inv{option}	Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}
+
+				*:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
+:se[t] {option}&	Reset option to its default value.  May depend on the
+			current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi}
+:se[t] {option}&vi	Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
+:se[t] {option}&vim	Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}
+
+:se[t] all&		Set all options, except terminal options, to their
+			default value.	The values of 'term', 'lines' and
+			'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}
+
+						*:set-args* *E487* *E521*
+:se[t] {option}={value}		or
+:se[t] {option}:{value}
+			Set string or number option to {value}.
+			For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
+			hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0')
+			(hex and octal are only available for machines which
+			have the strtol() function).
+			The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
+			default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
+			set).  See |cmdline-completion|.
+			White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
+			will be ignored.  White space between '=' and {value}
+			is not allowed.
+			See |option-backslash| for using white space and
+			backslashes in {value}.
+
+:se[t] {option}+={value}				*:set+=*
+			Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
+			{value} to a string option.  When the option is a
+			comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
+			value was empty.
+			If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
+			are removed.  Otherwise there is no check for doubled
+			values.  You can avoid this by removing a value first.
+			Example: >
+				:set guioptions-=T guioptions+=T
+<			Also see |:set-args| above.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+:se[t] {option}^={value}				*:set^=*
+			Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
+			the {value} to a string option.  When the option is a
+			comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
+			value was empty.
+			Also see |:set-args| above.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+:se[t] {option}-={value}				*:set-=*
+			Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
+			the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
+			If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
+			is no error or warning.  When the option is a comma
+			separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
+			becomes empty.
+			When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
+			exactly as they appear in the option.  Remove flags
+			one by one to avoid problems.
+			Also see |:set-args| above.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated.  For example: >
+	:set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
+If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
+and the following arguments will be ignored.
+
+							*:set-verbose*
+When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
+was last set.  Example: >
+	:verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
+	  shiftwidth=4
+		  Last set from modeline
+	  cindent
+		  Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim
+This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":set
+all" or ":set" without an argument.
+When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message.  There is only
+one value for all local options with the same name.  Thus the message applies
+to the option name, not necessarily its value.
+When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
+autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
+Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting
+'compatible'.
+{not available when compiled without the +eval feature}
+
+							*:set-termcap* *E522*
+For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a termcap option.  This will
+override the value from the termcap.  You can then use it in a mapping.  If
+the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: >
+	:set <t_#4>=^[Ot
+This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key.  For
+example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
+	:set <M-b>=^[b
+(the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
+The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.
+
+The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi.  Long string options are put
+at the end of the list.  The number of options is quite large.	The output of
+"set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
+|more-prompt|.
+
+							*option-backslash*
+To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
+backslash.  To include a backslash you have to use two.  Effectively this
+means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
+down).
+A few examples: >
+   :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags	    results in "tags /usr/tags"
+   :set tags=tags\\,file	    results in "tags\,file"
+   :set tags=tags\\\ file	    results in "tags\ file"
+
+The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command.	To
+include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead.	This example sets the
+'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
+   :set titlestring=hi\|there
+This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
+   :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there
+
+For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed.	More
+precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment
+variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not
+removed.  But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,
+etc.) is used like explained above.
+There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
+   :set dir=\\machine\path	    results in "\\machine\path"
+   :set dir=\\\\machine\\path	    results in "\\machine\path"
+   :set dir=\\path\\file	    results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
+For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
+are halved.  This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
+halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept.	The third gives a
+result which is probably not what you want.  Avoid it.
+
+				*add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
+				*E539* *E550* *E551* *E552*
+Some options are a list of flags.  When you want to add a flag to such an
+option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
+   :set guioptions+=a
+Remove a flag from an option like this: >
+   :set guioptions-=a
+This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
+Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time.	If 'guioptions' has
+the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
+doesn't appear.
+
+			   *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
+Environment variables in most string options will be expanded.	If the
+environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
+name is replaced with its value.  If it does not exist the '$' and the name
+are not modified.  Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
+follow the environment variable name.  That character and what follows is
+appended to the value of the environment variable.  Examples: >
+   :set term=$TERM.new
+   :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
+When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
+opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.
+
+
+Handling of local options			*local-options*
+
+Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer.  Each window or buffer
+has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value.  This
+allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another.  And set
+'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.
+
+The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
+situations.  You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
+the option values you would expect.  Unfortunately, doing what the user
+expects is a bit complicated...
+
+When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window.  Thus
+right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.
+
+When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized.  Since
+the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
+these are not used.  Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
+global value, which is used for new buffers.  With ":set" both the local and
+global value is changed.  With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
+thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.
+
+When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
+options are used again.  If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
+values from back then are used.  Otherwise the values from the window where
+the buffer was edited last are used.
+
+It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
+When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
+using these local window options.  Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
+local window options, which is used when editing another buffer.  Each window
+has its own copy of these values.  Thus these are local to the window, but
+global to all buffers in the window.  With this you can do: >
+	:e one
+	:set list
+	:e two
+Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
+command you have also set the global value. >
+	:set nolist
+	:e one
+	:setlocal list
+	:e two
+Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
+value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
+global value.  Note that if you do this next: >
+	:e one
+You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
+"one".	The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.
+
+							*:setl* *:setlocal*
+:setl[ocal] ...		Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
+			current buffer or window.  Not all options have a
+			local value.  If the option does not have a local
+			value the global value is set.
+			With the "all" argument: display all local option's
+			local values.
+			Without argument: Display all local option's local
+			values which are different from the default.
+			When displaying a specific local option, show the
+			local value.  For a global option the global value is
+			shown (but that might change in the future).
+			{not in Vi}
+
+:setl[ocal] {option}<	Set the local value of {option} to its global value.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+							*:setg* *:setglobal*
+:setg[lobal] ...	Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
+			option without changing the local value.
+			When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
+			With the "all" argument: display all local option's
+			global values.
+			Without argument: display all local option's global
+			values which are different from the default.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+For buffer-local and window-local options:
+	Command		 global value	    local value ~
+      :set option=value	     set		set
+ :setlocal option=value	      -			set
+:setglobal option=value	     set		 -
+      :set option?	      -		       display
+ :setlocal option?	      -		       display
+:setglobal option?	    display		 -
+
+
+Global options with a local value			*global-local*
+
+Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers.  For some
+global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.  You can
+set the local value with ":setlocal".  That buffer will then use the local
+value, while other buffers continue using the global value.
+
+For example, you have two windows, both on C source code.  They use the global
+'makeprg' option.  If you do this in one of the two windows: >
+	:set makeprg=gmake
+then the other window will switch to the same value.  There is no need to set
+the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
+However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
+another 'makeprog' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
+files.	You use this command: >
+	:setlocal makeprg=perlmake
+You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
+	:setlocal makeprg=
+This only works for a string option.  For a boolean option you need to use the
+"<" flag, like this: >
+	:setlocal autoread<
+Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
+local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
+when changing the global value later).
+Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local.  Using
+":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.
+
+
+Setting the filetype
+
+:setf[iletype] {filetype}			*:setf* *:setfiletype*
+			Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
+			not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
+			This is short for: >
+				:if !did_filetype()
+				:  setlocal filetype={filetype}
+				:endif
+<			This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
+			setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
+			settings and syntax files to be loaded.
+			{not in Vi}
+
+:bro[wse] se[t]			*:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
+:opt[ions]		Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
+			Options are grouped by function.
+			Offers short help for each option.  Hit <CR> on the
+			short help to open a help window with more help for
+			the option.
+			Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
+			"set" line to set the new value.  For window and
+			buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
+			used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
+			window, in which case the window below help window is
+			used (skipping the option-window).
+			{not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
+			|+autocmd| features}
+
+								*$HOME*
+Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
+option and after a space or comma.
+
+On Unix systems "~user" can be used too.  It is replaced by the home directory
+of user "user".  Example: >
+    :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.
+
+On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too.  The name between {} can
+contain non-id characters then.  Note that if you want to use this for the
+"gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.
+
+NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
+command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".
+
+
+Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited.  How much depends on
+the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
+
+							*:fix* *:fixdel*
+:fix[del]		Set the value of 't_kD':
+				't_kb' is     't_kD' becomes	~
+				  CTRL-?	CTRL-H
+				not CTRL-?	CTRL-?
+
+			(CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi}
+
+			If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the
+			code for backspace is alright, you can put this in
+			your .vimrc: >
+				:fixdel
+<			This works no matter what the actual code for
+			backspace is.
+
+			If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can
+			use this: >
+				:if &term == "termname"
+				:  set t_kb=^V<BS>
+				:  fixdel
+				:endif
+<			Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key
+			(don't type four characters!).	Replace "termname"
+			with your terminal name.
+
+			If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not
+			CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel".  Then use: >
+				:if &term == "termname"
+				:  set t_kD=^V<Delete>
+				:endif
+<			Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key
+			(don't type eight characters!).  Replace "termname"
+			with your terminal name.
+
+							*Linux-backspace*
+			Note about Linux: By default the backspace key
+			produces CTRL-?, which is wrong.  You can fix it by
+			putting this line in your rc.local: >
+				echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys
+<
+							*NetBSD-backspace*
+			Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce
+			the right code, try this: >
+				xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"
+<			If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: >
+				keysym 22 = BackSpace
+<			You need to restart for this to take effect.
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Automatically setting options			*auto-setting*
+
+Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives
+to set options automatically for one or more files:
+
+1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places.  See
+   |initialization|.  Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,
+   and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.
+   You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and
+   |:mksession|.
+2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.
+   This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and
+   many other things.  See |autocommand|.
+3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a
+   number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for
+   modelines.  This is explained here.
+
+					*modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
+There are two forms of modelines.  The first form:
+	[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}
+
+[text]		any text or empty
+{white}		at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
+{vi:|vim:|ex:}	the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
+[white]		optional white space
+{options}	a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
+		where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
+		command
+
+Example: >
+   vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6
+
+The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):
+
+	[text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]
+
+[text]		any text or empty
+{white}		at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
+{vi:|vim:|ex:}	the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
+[white]		optional white space
+se[t]		the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
+{options}	a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
+		argument for a ":set" command
+:		a colon
+[text]		any text or empty
+
+Example: >
+   /* vim: set ai tw=75: */
+
+The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required.  This minimizes the chance
+that a normal word like "lex:" is caught.  There is one exception: "vi:" and
+"vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
+3.0).  Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
+short for "example:").
+
+							*modeline-local*
+The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
+buffer that contains the window.  Although it's possible to set global options
+from a modeline, this is unusual.  If you have two windows open and the files
+in it set the same global option to a different value, the result depends on
+which one was opened last.
+
+							*modeline-version*
+If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
+number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
+	vim{vers}:	version {vers} or later
+	vim<{vers}:	version before {vers}
+	vim={vers}:	version {vers}
+	vim>{vers}:	version after {vers}
+{vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
+For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later: >
+	/* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */
+To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7: >
+	/* vim<570: set sw=4: */
+There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".
+
+
+The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
+If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.
+
+Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
+like: >
+   /* vi:ts=4: */
+will give an error message for the trailing "*/".  This line is OK: >
+   /* vi:set ts=4: */
+
+If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.
+
+If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'.  The
+backslash in front of the ':' will be removed.	Example: >
+   /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */
+This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp".  Only a single backslash before the
+':' is removed.  Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".
+
+No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
+might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).
+
+Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
+define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string.  For
+example: >
+	au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
+And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
+"VAR".
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Options summary					*option-summary*
+
+In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
+an abbreviation if there is one.  Both forms may be used.
+
+In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
+is entered.  When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.
+
+For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is
+used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when
+'compatible' is set.
+
+Most options are the same in all windows and buffers.  There are a few that
+are specific to how the text is presented in a window.	These can be set to a
+different value in each window.  For example the 'list' option can be set in
+one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
+at the same time.  There are a few options that are specific to a certain
+file.  These can have a different value for each file or buffer.  For example
+the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
+program.
+
+	global			one option for all buffers and windows
+	local to window		each window has its own copy of this option
+	local to buffer		each buffer has its own copy of this option
+
+When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
+are used as a default value for the window-specific options.  For the
+buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
+'cpoptions' option.  If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
+buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
+first entered.	If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
+is entered, this is almost like having global options.	If 's' and 'S' are not
+present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
+buffer is created.
+
+Not all options are supported in all versions.	To test if option "foo" can be
+used with ":set" use "exists('&foo')".	This doesn't mean the value is
+actually remembered and works.	Some options are hidden, which means that you
+can set them but the value is not remembered.  To test if option "foo" is
+really supported use "exists('+foo')".
+
+							*E355*
+A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
+
+					*'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph*
+'aleph' 'al'		number	(default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet.  The
+	routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode
+	(when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)
+	outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].
+	aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.
+	See |rileft.txt|.
+
+			*'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
+'allowrevins' 'ari'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode.  This is default off, to
+	avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
+	into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out.  See
+	'revins'.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+			 *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'*
+'altkeymap' 'akm'	boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+farsi|
+			feature}
+	When on, the second language is Farsi. In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles
+	the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.
+
+	When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English. This
+	is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right
+	mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left
+	mode).	See |farsi.txt|.
+
+						*'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
+'ambiwidth' 'ambw'	string (default: "single")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+	Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.
+	Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
+	Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
+	letters, Cyrillic letters).
+
+	There are currently two possible values:
+	"single":	Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII. This is
+			expected by most users.
+	"double":	Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
+
+	There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
+	those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
+	legacy/traditional CJK encodings.  In those encodings, Euro,
+	Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
+	therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them. This is also
+	true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
+	file. Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
+	Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
+	(or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
+	this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
+	by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font.  Perhaps it also has
+	to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP
+	when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales.  See Unicode
+	Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).
+
+			*'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
+'antialias' 'anti'	boolean (default: off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled
+			on Mac OS X}
+	This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X
+	v10.2 or later.  When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts,
+	which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays.
+	Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set
+	to its default (empty string).
+
+			*'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'*
+'autochdir' 'acd'	boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the
+			|+netbeans_intg| or |+sun_workshop| feature}
+	When on, Vim will change its value for the current working directory
+	whenever you open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or
+	open/close a window. It will change to the directory containing the
+	file which was opened or selected.  This option is provided for
+	backward compatibility with the Vim released with Sun ONE Studio 4
+	Enterprise Edition.
+
+				*'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
+'arabic' 'arab'		boolean (default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
+			feature}
+	This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
+	Setting this option will:
+	- Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
+	- Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
+	- Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
+	  between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
+	- Set the 'delcombine' option
+	Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.
+
+	Resetting this option will:
+	- Reset the 'rightleft' option.
+	- Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
+	Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
+	option.
+	Also see |arabic.txt|.
+
+					*'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
+					*'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
+'arabicshape' 'arshape'	boolean (default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
+			feature}
+	When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
+	corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
+	take affect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
+	one which encompasses:
+	  a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
+	     within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
+	  b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
+	  c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
+	When disabled the character display reverts back to each character's
+	true stand-alone form.
+	Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
+	further details see |arabic.txt|.
+
+			*'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
+'autoindent' 'ai'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+	Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
+	in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command).  If you do not
+	type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
+	<Esc> or <CR>, the indent is deleted again.  When autoindent is on,
+	formatting (with the "gq" command or when you reach 'textwidth' in
+	Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first line.
+	When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
+	a different way.
+	The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
+	{small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
+	<Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
+	deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.
+
+				 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
+'autoread' 'ar'		boolean	(default off)
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
+	it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
+	When the file has been deleted this is not done.  |timestamp|
+	If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
+	using the global value: >
+		:set autoread<
+<
+				 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
+'autowrite' 'aw'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+	Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
+	:next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,
+	:make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a CTRL-O, CTRL-I,
+	'{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.
+	Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
+	'autowriteall' for that.
+
+			 *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
+'autowriteall' 'awa'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",
+	":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
+	Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
+	been set.
+
+							*'background'* *'bg'*
+'background' 'bg'	string	(default "dark" or "light")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a
+	dark background.  When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that
+	look good on a light background.  Any other value is illegal.
+	Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.
+	This will not always be correct.
+	Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim
+	what the background color looks like.  For changing the background
+	color, see |:hi-normal|.
+
+	When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for
+	the new value.	But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not
+	change.
+	When a color scheme is loaded (the "colors_name" variable is set)
+	setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded.  If
+	the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
+	However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
+	be undone.  First delete the "colors_name" variable when needed.
+
+	When setting 'background' to the default value with: >
+		:set background&
+<	Vim will guess the value.  In the GUI this should work correctly,
+	in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.
+
+	When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
+	"light".  When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
+	that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to
+	"dark".  But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read
+	(because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background
+	color).  To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by
+	putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value
+	of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").
+	Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file.  Possibly
+	depending on the terminal name.  Example: >
+		:if &term == "pcterm"
+		:  set background=dark
+		:endif
+<	When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
+	will change.  To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
+	the setting of the 'background' option.
+	This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
+	to select the colors for syntax highlighting.  After changing this
+	option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result.  This can be
+	done with ":syntax on".
+
+							*'backspace'* *'bs'*
+'backspace' 'bs'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
+	mode.  This is a list of items, separated by commas.  Each item allows
+	a way to backspace over something:
+	value	effect	~
+	indent	allow backspacing over autoindent
+	eol	allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
+	start	allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
+		stop once at the start of insert.
+
+	When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.
+
+	For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:
+	value	effect	~
+	  0	same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)
+	  1	same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"
+	  2	same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"
+
+	See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.
+	NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.
+
+				*'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
+'backup' 'bk'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Make a backup before overwriting a file.  Leave it around after the
+	file has been successfully written.  If you do not want to keep the
+	backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
+	written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
+	the default).  If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
+	options (use this if your file system is almost full).	See the
+	|backup-table| for more explanations.
+	When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
+	When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
+	oldest version of a file.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
+'backupcopy' 'bkc'	string	(Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
+	done.  This is a comma separated list of words.
+
+	The main values are:
+	"yes"	make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
+	"no"	rename the file and write a new one
+	"auto"	one of the previous, what works best
+
+	Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
+	"breaksymlink"	always break symlinks when writing
+	"breakhardlink"	always break hardlinks when writing
+
+	Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
+	- Takes extra time to copy the file.
+	+ When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
+	  has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
+	- When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
+	  not of the real file.
+
+	Renaming the file and writing a new one:
+	+ It's fast.
+	- Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
+	  file.
+	- When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.
+
+	The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file
+	is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and
+	and the file is not a link) that is used.  When problems are expected,
+	a copy will be made.
+
+	The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
+	combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto".  When included, they
+	force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
+	exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
+	become the backup and writing a new file in its place.  This can be
+	useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
+	hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
+	be propagated back to the original source.
+							*crontab*
+	One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
+	that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
+	the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
+	backup file instead of the newly created file.	"crontab -e" is an
+	example.
+
+	When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
+	with the new text.  This means that protection bits, owner and
+	symbolic links of the original file are unmodified.  The backup file
+	however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file.	The
+	group of the backup is set to the group of the original file.  If this
+	fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
+	others.
+
+	When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has
+	the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
+	is owned by the current user.  When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
+	link, the new file will not!  That's why the "auto" value doesn't
+	rename when the file is a link.  The owner and group of the newly
+	written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
+	the system may refuse to do this.  In that case the "auto" value will
+	again not rename the file.
+
+						*'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
+'backupdir' 'bdir'	string	(default for Amiga: ".,t:",
+				 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp"
+				 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
+	- The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
+	  where this is possible.
+	- Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
+	  impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
+	- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
+	  as the edited file.
+	- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
+	  put the backup file relative to where the edited file is.  The
+	  leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
+	  ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
+	- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
+	  of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
+	  name, precede it with a backslash.
+	- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
+	- A directory name may end in an '/'.
+	- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
+	  get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
+	    :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
+<	- For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
+	  of the option is removed.
+	See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
+	If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
+		:set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
+<	You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
+	home directory for this to work properly.
+	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
+'backupext' 'bex'	string	(default "~", for VMS: "_")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
+	backup file.  The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
+	accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file.  You might
+	prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
+	".bak" that you want to keep.
+
+						*'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
+'backupskip' 'bsk'	string	(default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
+			feature}
+	A list of file patterns.  When one of the patterns matches with the
+	name of the file which is written, no backup file is created.  Both
+	the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
+	The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
+	Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
+	When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
+	default value. "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.
+
+						*'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'*
+'balloondelay' 'bdlay'	number	(default: 600)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
+			feature}
+	Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up.  See |balloon-eval|.
+
+		       *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'*
+'ballooneval' 'beval'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
+			and |+sun_workshop| or |+netbeans_intg| features}
+	Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.
+
+				     *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
+'binary' 'bin'		boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option should be set before editing a binary file.  You can also
+	use the |-b| Vim argument.  When this option is switched on a few
+	options will be changed (also when it already was on):
+		'textwidth'  will be set to 0
+		'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
+		'modeline'   will be off
+		'expandtab'  will be off
+	Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
+	file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
+	separates lines).
+	The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
+	file is read without conversion.
+	NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
+	on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
+	'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing.  You might want to set
+	'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
+	The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
+	'bin' is switched from on to off.  Each buffer has its own set of
+	saved option values.
+	To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
+	This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
+	files you edit.
+	When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
+	there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
+	the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer).  See
+	the 'endofline' option.
+
+			*'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'*
+'bioskey' 'biosk'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
+	When on the bios is called to obtain a keyboard character.  This works
+	better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console.  When using a
+	terminal over a serial port reset this option.
+	Also see |'conskey'|.
+
+							*'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
+'bomb'			boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+	When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
+	Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
+	- this option is on
+	- the 'binary' option is off
+	- 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
+	  endian variants.
+	Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
+	Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows.  For other applications it
+	causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
+	appear halfway the resulting file.
+	When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
+	check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
+	Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
+	don't see it when editing.  When you don't change the options, the BOM
+	will be restored when writing the file.
+
+						*'breakat'* *'brk'*
+'breakat' 'brk'		string	(default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the  |+linebreak|
+			feature}
+	This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
+	break if 'linebreak' is on.
+
+						*'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
+'browsedir' 'bsdir'	string	(default for "last")
+			global
+			{not in Vi} {only for Motif and Win32 GUI}
+	Which directory to use for the file browser:
+	   last		Use same directory as with last file browser.
+	   buffer	Use the directory of the related buffer.
+	   current	Use the current directory.
+	   {path}	Use the specified directory
+
+						*'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
+'bufhidden' 'bh'	string (default: "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
+			feature}
+	This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
+	displayed in a window:
+	  <empty>	follow the global 'hidden' option
+	  hide		hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'
+			is not set
+	  unload	unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using
+			|:hide|
+	  delete	delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when
+			'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
+			|:bdelete|
+	  wipe		wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when
+			'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
+			|:bwipeout|
+
+	This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
+	special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
+
+			*'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85*
+'buflisted' 'bl'	boolean (default: on)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list.  If
+	it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
+	This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
+	a file name or marks.  Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
+	But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".
+
+						*'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
+'buftype' 'bt'		string (default: "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
+			feature}
+	The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
+	  <empty>	normal buffer
+	  nofile	buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
+			written
+	  nowrite	buffer which will not be written
+	  quickfix	quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
+	  help		help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
+			manually)
+
+	This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
+	specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
+
+	Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!
+
+	A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list.  This value is
+	set by the |:cwindow| command and you are not supposed to change it.
+
+	"nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
+	both:		The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
+			work (":w filename" does work though).
+	both:		The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
+			There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
+			example when you quit Vim.
+	both:		A swap file is only created when using too much memory
+			(when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
+			file).
+	nofile only:	The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
+			file name.  It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
+			command.
+
+						*'casemap'* *'cmp'*
+'casemap' 'cmp'		string	(default: "internal,keepascii")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Specifies details about changing the case of letters.  It may contain
+	these words, separated by a comma:
+	internal	Use internal case mapping functions, the current
+			locale does not change the case mapping.  This only
+			matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding.	When
+			"internal" is omitted, the towupper() and towlower()
+			system library functions are used when available.
+	keepascii	For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
+			case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
+			This probably only matters for Turkish.
+
+						*'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
+'cdpath' 'cd'		string	(default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+file_in_path| feature}
+	This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
+	|:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched
+	for has a relative path (not starting with "/", "./" or "../").
+	The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
+	|'path'|.  Also see |file-searching|.
+	The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
+	in the current directory first.
+	If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
+	a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
+	override it: >
+	  :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
+<	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+	(parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).
+
+						*'cedit'*
+'cedit'			string	(Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
+			feature}
+	The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
+	The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.
+	Only non-printable keys are allowed.
+	The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
+	type.  The preferred way is to use the <> notation.  Examples: >
+		:set cedit=<C-Y>
+		:set cedit=<Esc>
+<	|Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
+	See |cmdwin|.
+
+				*'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
+'charconvert' 'ccv'	string (default "")
+			global
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature and the |+eval| feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	An expression that is used for character encoding conversion.  It is
+	evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
+	different encoding from what is desired.
+	'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
+	supported and is able to do the conversion.  Using iconv() is
+	preferred, because it is much faster.
+	'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
+	file to convert from.  You will have to save the text in a file first.
+	The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,
+	non-zero for failure.
+	The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.
+	Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
+	used.
+	Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
+	is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
+	'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'
+	flag is present in 'viminfo'.  Also used for Unicode conversion.
+	Example: >
+		set charconvert=CharConvert()
+		fun CharConvert()
+		  system("recode "
+			\ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to
+			\ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)
+		  return v:shell_error
+		endfun
+<	The related Vim variables are:
+		v:charconvert_from	name of the current encoding
+		v:charconvert_to	name of the desired encoding
+		v:fname_in		name of the input file
+		v:fname_out		name of the output file
+	Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
+	Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different
+	from 'encoding'.  Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.
+	Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'.  If you want
+	to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care
+	of this.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+				   *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
+'cindent' 'cin'		boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
+			feature}
+	Enables automatic C program indenting  See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
+	that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
+	preferred indent style.
+	If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
+	If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
+	the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
+	external program.
+	See |C-indenting|.
+	When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
+	option or 'indentexpr'.
+	This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+							*'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
+'cinkeys' 'cink'	string	(default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
+			feature}
+	A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
+	the current line.  Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
+	empty.
+	For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
+	See |C-indenting|.
+
+						*'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
+'cinoptions' 'cino'	string	(default "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
+			feature}
+	The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
+	program.  See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
+	|C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.
+
+
+						*'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
+'cinwords' 'cinw'	string	(default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without both the
+			|+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features}
+	These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
+	'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set.  For 'cindent' this is only done at
+	an appropriate place (inside {}).
+	Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'.  If case doesn't
+	matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
+	"if,If,IF".
+
+						*'clipboard'* *'cb'*
+'clipboard' 'cb'	string	(default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"
+						  for X-windows, "" otherwise)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard|
+			feature is included}
+	This option is a list of comma separated names.
+	These names are recognized:
+
+	unnamed		When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
+			for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
+			would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
+			register is explicitly specified, it will always be
+			used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
+			or not.  The clipboard register can always be
+			explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
+			|gui-clipboard|.
+
+	autoselect	Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
+			then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
+			area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
+			windowing system's global selection or put the
+			selected text on the clipboard used by the selection
+			register "*.  See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for
+			details.  When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in
+			'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this
+			"autoselect" flag is used.
+			Also applies to the modeless selection.
+
+	autoselectml	Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
+			only.  Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.
+
+	exclude:{pattern}
+			Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
+			the terminal 'term'.  If there is a match, no
+			connection will be made to the X server.  This is
+			useful in this situation:
+			- Running Vim in a console.
+			- $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another
+			  display.
+			- You do not want to connect to the X server in the
+			  console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.
+			To never connect to the X server use: >
+				exclude:.*
+<			This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument.
+			Note that when there is no connection to the X server
+			the window title won't be restored and the clipboard
+			cannot be accessed.
+			The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is
+			interpreted as if 'magic' was on.
+			The rest of the option value will be used for
+			{pattern}, this must be the last entry.
+
+						*'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
+'cmdheight' 'ch'	number	(default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Number of screen lines to use for the command-line.  Helps avoiding
+	|hit-enter| prompts.
+
+						*'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
+'cmdwinheight' 'cwh'	number	(default 7)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
+			feature}
+	Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|
+
+						*'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
+'columns' 'co'		number	(default 80 or terminal width)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Number of columns of the screen.  Normally this is set by the terminal
+	initialization and does not have to be set by hand.
+	When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
+	option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
+	to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
+	When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
+	number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.
+
+					*'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
+'comments' 'com'	string	(default
+				"s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+comments|
+			feature}
+	A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line.  See
+	|format-comments|.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
+	insert a space.
+
+					*'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
+'commentstring' 'cms'	string	(default "/*%s*/")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	A template for a comment.  The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
+	comment text.  Currently only used to add markers for folding, see
+	|fold-marker|.
+
+			*'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
+'compatible' 'cp'	boolean	(default on, off when a .vimrc file is found)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
+	make Vim behave in a more useful way.
+	This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,
+	other options are also changed as a side effect.  CAREFUL: Setting or
+	resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings
+	are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc.	If you
+	set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the
+	very start.
+	By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the
+	options.  This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
+	just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
+	option.
+	When a ".vimrc" file is found while Vim is starting up, this option is
+	switched off, and all options that have not been modified will be set
+	to the Vim defaults.  Effectively, this means that when a ".vimrc"
+	file exists, Vim will use the Vim defaults, otherwise it will use the
+	Vi defaults.  (Note: This doesn't happen for the system-wide vimrc
+	file).	Also see |compatible-default|.
+	You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
+	"-N".  See |-C| and |-N|.
+	Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
+	that have a different Vi and Vim default value.  See the options
+	marked with a '+' below.  Other options are not modified.
+	At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set
+	or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible.  See the table
+	below.	This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible
+	editing.
+	See also 'cpoptions'.
+
+	option		+ set value	effect	~
+
+	'allowrevins'	  off		no CTRL-_ command
+	'backupcopy'	  Unix: "yes"	  backup file is a copy
+			  others: "auto"  copy or rename backup file
+	'backspace'	  ""		normal backspace
+	'backup'	  off		no backup file
+	'cindent'	  off		no C code indentation
+	'cedit'		+ ""		no key to open the |cmdwin|
+	'cpoptions'	+ (all flags)	Vi-compatible flags
+	'cscopetag'	  off		don't use cscope for ":tag"
+	'cscopetagorder'  0		see |cscopetagorder|
+	'cscopeverbose'	  off		see |cscopeverbose|
+	'digraph'	  off		no digraphs
+	'esckeys'	+ off		no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode
+	'expandtab'	  off		tabs not expanded to spaces
+	'fileformats'	+ ""		no automatic file format detection,
+			  "dos,unix"	except for DOS, Windows and OS/2
+	'formatoptions'	+ "vt"		Vi compatible formatting
+	'gdefault'	  off		no default 'g' flag for ":s"
+	'history'	+ 0		no commandline history
+	'hkmap'		  off		no Hebrew keyboard mapping
+	'hkmapp'	  off		no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
+	'hlsearch'	  off		no highlighting of search matches
+	'incsearch'	  off		no incremental searching
+	'indentexpr'	  ""		no indenting by expression
+	'insertmode'	  off		do not start in Insert mode
+	'iskeyword'	+ "@,48-57,_"	keywords contain alphanumeric
+						characters and '_'
+	'joinspaces'	  on		insert 2 spaces after period
+	'modeline'	+ off		no modelines
+	'more'		+ off		no pauses in listings
+	'revins'	  off		no reverse insert
+	'ruler'		  off		no ruler
+	'scrolljump'	  1		no jump scroll
+	'scrolloff'	  0		no scroll offset
+	'shiftround'	  off		indent not rounded to shiftwidth
+	'shortmess'	+ ""		no shortening of messages
+	'showcmd'	+ off		command characters not shown
+	'showmode'	+ off		current mode not shown
+	'smartcase'	  off		no automatic ignore case switch
+	'smartindent'	  off		no smart indentation
+	'smarttab'	  off		no smart tab size
+	'softtabstop'	  0		tabs are always 'tabstop' positions
+	'startofline'	  on		goto startofline with some commands
+	'tagrelative'	+ off		tag file names are not relative
+	'textauto'	+ off		no automatic textmode detection
+	'textwidth'	  0		no automatic line wrap
+	'tildeop'	  off		tilde is not an operator
+	'ttimeout'	  off		no terminal timeout
+	'whichwrap'	+ ""		left-right movements don't wrap
+	'wildchar'	+ CTRL-E	only when the current value is <Tab>
+					use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
+	'writebackup'	  on or off	depends on +writebackup feature
+
+						*'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
+'complete' 'cpt'	string	(default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
+	when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used.  It is also used for whole-line
+	completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of completion
+	and the places to scan.  It is a comma separated list of flags:
+	.	scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
+	w	scan buffers from other windows
+	b	scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
+	u	scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
+	U	scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
+	k	scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
+	k{dict}	scan the file {dict}.  Several "k" flags can be given,
+		patterns are valid too.  For example: >
+			:set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
+<	s	scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
+	s{tsr}	scan the file {tsr}.  Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
+		are valid too.
+	i	scan current and included files
+	d	scan current and included files for defined name or macro
+		|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
+	]	tag completion
+	t	same as "]"
+
+	Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
+	not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
+	(gzipped files for example).  Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
+	whole-line completion.
+
+	The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:
+	   1. the current buffer
+	   2. buffers in other windows
+	   3. other loaded buffers
+	   4. unloaded buffers
+	   5. tags
+	   6. included files
+
+	As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
+	based expansion (eg dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
+	|i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions)
+
+				*'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
+'confirm' 'cf'		boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
+	fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
+	instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current
+	file(s).  You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
+	If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
+	command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
+	command.
+	Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.
+
+			*'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'*
+'conskey' 'consk'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
+	When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
+	This should work in most cases.  Also see |'bioskey'|.	Together,
+	three methods of console input are available:
+	'conskey'   'bioskey'	    action ~
+	   on	     on or off	    direct console input
+	   off		on	    BIOS
+	   off		off	    STDIN
+
+			*'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
+'copyindent' 'ci'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
+	new line.  Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
+	tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
+	in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option makes the
+	new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
+	existing line.  If the new indent is greater than on the existing
+	line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
+	NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+	Also see 'preserveindent'.
+
+						*'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
+'cpoptions' 'cpo'	string	(Vim default: "aABceFs",
+				 Vi default:  all flags)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	A sequence of single character flags.  When a character is present
+	this indicates vi-compatible behavior.	This is used for things where
+	not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
+	'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
+	Commas can be added for readability.
+	To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
+	"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+	    contains	behavior	~
+								*cpo-a*
+		a	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
+			argument will set the alternate file name for the
+			current window.
+								*cpo-A*
+		A	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
+			argument will set the alternate file name for the
+			current window.
+								*cpo-b*
+		b	"\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
+			the map command.  The '\' is included in the mapping,
+			the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
+			command.  Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
+			include the '|' in the mapping.  Applies to all
+			mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
+			See also |map_bar|.
+								*cpo-B*
+		B	A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
+			abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.
+			Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a
+			CTRL-V.  For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"
+			results in X being mapped to:
+				'B' included:	"\^["	 (^[ is a real <Esc>)
+				'B' excluded:	"<Esc>"  (5 characters)
+				('<' excluded in both cases)
+								*cpo-c*
+		c	Searching continues at the end of any match at the
+			cursor position, but not further than the start of the
+			next line.  When not present searching continues
+			one character from the cursor position.  With 'c'
+			"abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
+			"/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
+								*cpo-C*
+		C	Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
+			backslash.  See |line-continuation|.
+								*cpo-d*
+		d	Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
+			the tags file relative to the current file, but the
+			tags file in the current directory.
+								*cpo-D*
+		D	Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
+			commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
+			|t|.
+								*cpo-e*
+		e	When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
+			<CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
+			linewise.  If this flag is not present, the register
+			is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
+			<CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
+			and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
+								*cpo-E*
+		E	It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
+			"gU" on an Empty region.  The operators only work when
+			at least one character is to be operate on.  Example:
+			This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
+								*cpo-f*
+		f	When included, a ":read" command with a file name
+			argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
+			if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
+								*cpo-F*
+		F	When included, a ":write" command with a file name
+			argument will set the file name for the current
+			buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
+			yet.
+								*cpo-g*
+		g	Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.
+								*cpo-i*
+		i	When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
+			leave it modified.
+								*cpo-j*
+		j	When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',
+			not after '!' or '?'.  Also see 'joinspaces'.
+								*cpo-J*
+		J	A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
+			the '.', '!' or '?'. A <Tab> is not recognized as
+			white space.
+								*cpo-k*
+		k	Disable the recognition of raw key codes in
+			mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu
+			commands.  For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[
+			is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X
+			being mapped to:
+				'k' included:	"^[OA"	 (3 characters)
+				'k' excluded:	"<Key>"  (one key code)
+			Also see the '<' flag below.
+								*cpo-K*
+		K	Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
+			halfway a mapping.  This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when
+			only part of the second <F1> has been read.  It
+			enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.
+								*cpo-l*
+		l	Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
+			literally, only "\]" is special  See |/[]|
+			   'l' included: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
+			   'l' excluded: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space> and <Tab>
+								*cpo-L*
+		L	When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
+			'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
+			(see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
+			the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
+								*cpo-m*
+		m	When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
+			second.  When not included, a showmatch will wait half
+			a second or until a character is typed.  |'showmatch'|
+								*cpo-M*
+		M	When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
+			account.  Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
+			parenthesis match.  When included "%" ignores
+			backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
+								*cpo-n*
+		n	When included, the column used for 'number' will also
+			be used for text of wrapped lines.
+								*cpo-o*
+		o	Line offset to search command is not remembered for
+			next search.
+								*cpo-O*
+		O	Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
+			when it didn't exist when editing it.  This is a
+			protection against a file unexpectedly created by
+			someone else.  Vi didn't complain about this.
+								*cpo-p*
+		p	Vi compatible Lisp indenting.  When not present, a
+			slightly better algorithm is used.
+								*cpo-r*
+		r	Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
+			command, instead of the actually used search string.
+								*cpo-R*
+		R	Remove marks from filtered lines.  Without this flag
+			marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
+								*cpo-s*
+		s	Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
+			first time.  This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
+			And it is the default.	If not present the options are
+			set when the buffer is created.
+								*cpo-S*
+		S	Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
+			(except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
+			'syntax').  This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
+			The options are set to the values in the current
+			buffer.  When you change an option and go to another
+			buffer, the value is copied.  Effectively makes the
+			buffer options global to all buffers.
+
+			's'    'S'     copy buffer options
+			no     no      when buffer created
+			yes    no      when buffer first entered (default)
+			 X     yes     each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
+								*cpo-t*
+		t	Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
+			"n" command.  Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
+			the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
+			last used search pattern.
+								*cpo-u*
+		u	Undo is Vi compatible.	See |undo-two-ways|.
+								*cpo-v*
+		v	Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
+			Insert mode.  Without this flag the characters are
+			erased from the screen right away.  With this flag the
+			screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
+			characters.
+								*cpo-w*
+		w	When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one
+			character and not all blanks until the start of the
+			next word.
+								*cpo-W*
+		W	Don't overwrite a readonly file.  When omitted, ":w!"
+			overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
+								*cpo-x*
+		x	<Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
+			The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
+			because <Esc> normally aborts a command.  |c_<Esc>|
+								*cpo-y*
+		y	A yank command can be redone with ".".
+								*cpo-!*
+		!	When redoing a filter command, use the last used
+			external command, whatever it was.  Otherwise the last
+			used -filter- command is used.
+								*cpo-$*
+		$	When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
+			line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
+			The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
+			new text.  The line is redisplayed if you type any
+			command that moves the cursor from the insertion
+			point.
+								*cpo-%*
+		%	Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
+			Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
+			Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
+			Parens inside single and double quotes are also
+			counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
+			disturb the matching.  For example, in a line like
+			"if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
+			match the last one.  When this flag is not included,
+			parens inside single and double quotes are treated
+			specially.  When matching a paren outside of quotes,
+			everything inside quotes is ignored.  When matching a
+			paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
+			there is one).	This works very well for C programs.
+								*cpo-star*
+		*	Use ":*" in the same way as ":@".  When not included,
+			":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
+								*cpo-<*
+		<	Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>|
+			form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of
+			menu commands.	For example, the command
+			":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:
+				'<' included:	"<Tab>"  (5 characters)
+				'<' excluded:	"^I"	 (^I is a real <Tab>)
+			Also see the 'k' flag above.
+
+						*'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
+'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.
+	See |cscopepathcomp|.
+
+						*'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'*
+'cscopeprg' 'csprg'	string	(default "cscope")
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Specifies the command to execute cscope.  See |cscopeprg|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'*
+'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
+			or |+quickfix| features}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
+	See |cscopequickfix|.
+
+				*'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'*
+'cscopetag' 'cst'	boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Use cscope for tag commands.  See |cscope-options|.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'*
+'cscopetagorder' 'csto'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search.  See
+	|cscopetagorder|.
+	NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
+
+					*'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'*
+					*'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'*
+'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Give messages when adding a cscope database.  See |cscopeverbose|.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'debug'*
+'debug'			string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When set to "msg", error messages that would otherwise be omitted will
+	be given anyway.  This is useful when debugging 'foldexpr' or
+	'indentexpr'.
+
+						*'define'* *'def'*
+'define' 'def'		string	(default "^\s*#\s*define")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	Pattern to be used to find a macro definition.	It is a search
+	pattern, just like for the "/" command.  This option is used for the
+	commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|.  The 'isident' option is
+	used to recognize the defined name after the match:
+		{match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
+	See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
+	or backslash.
+	The default value is for C programs.  For C++ this value would be
+	useful, to include const type declarations: >
+		^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
+<	When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!
+
+			*'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'*
+'delcombine' 'deco'	boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+	If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
+	"x" delete each combining character on its own.  When it is off (the
+	default) the character along with its combining characters are
+	deleted.
+	Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!
+
+	This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
+	may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
+	to remove only the combining ones.
+
+						*'dictionary'* *'dict'*
+'dictionary' 'dict'	string	(default "")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
+	for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|.  Each file should
+	contain a list of words.  This can be one word per line, or several
+	words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
+	preferred).  Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
+	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.	Spaces
+	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
+	name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
+	Where to find a list of words?
+	- On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
+	- In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
+	- In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.
+	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.
+	Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
+
+							*'diff'* *'nodiff'*
+'diff'			boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
+			feature}
+	Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
+	between files.	See |vimdiff|.
+
+						*'dex'* *'diffexpr'*
+'diffexpr' 'dex'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
+			feature}
+	Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two
+	versions of a file.  See |diff-diffexpr|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'dip'* *'diffopt'*
+'diffopt' 'dip'		string	(default "filler")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
+			feature}
+	Option settings for diff mode.	It can consist of the following items.
+	All are optional.  Items must be separated by a comma.
+
+		filler		Show filler lines, to keep the text
+				synchronized with a window that has inserted
+				lines at the same position.  Mostly useful
+				when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
+				is set.
+
+		context:{n}	Use a context of {n} lines between a change
+				and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
+				When omitted a context of six lines is used.
+				See |fold-diff|.
+
+		icase		Ignore changes in case of text.  "a" and "A"
+				are considered the same.  Adds the "-i" flag
+				to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.
+
+		iwhite		Ignore changes in amount of white space.  Adds
+				the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
+				'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
+				of the "diff" command for what this does
+				exactly.  It should ignore adding trailing
+				white space, but not leading white space.
+
+	Examples: >
+
+		:set diffopt=filler,context:4
+		:set diffopt=
+		:set diffopt=filler
+<
+				     *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
+'digraph' 'dg'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+digraphs|
+			feature}
+	Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
+	{char2}.  See |digraphs|.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'directory'* *'dir'*
+'directory' 'dir'	string	(default for Amiga: ".,t:",
+				 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp"
+				 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")
+			global
+	List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
+	- The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
+	  possible.
+	- Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
+	  impossible!).
+	- A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
+	  the edited file.  On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
+	  it doesn't show in a directory listing.  On MS-Windows the "hidden"
+	  attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
+	- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
+	  put the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
+	  "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
+	- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators, the
+	  swap file name will be built from the complete path to the file
+	  with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs. This will
+	  ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
+	- Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
+	  of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
+	  name, precede it with a backslash.
+	- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
+	- A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
+	- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	- Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
+	  get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
+	    :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
+<	- For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
+	  of the option is removed.
+	Using "." first in the list is recommended.  This means that editing
+	the same file twice will result in a warning.  Using "/tmp" on Unix is
+	discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.
+	"/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better
+	choice than "/tmp".  But it can contain a lot of files, your swap
+	files get lost in the crowd.  That is why a "tmp" directory in your
+	home directory is tried first.
+	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+	{Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}
+
+					*'display'* *'dy'*
+'display' 'dy'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Change the way text is displayed.  This is comma separated list of
+	flags:
+	lastline	When included, as much as possible of the last line
+			in a window will be displayed.	When not included, a
+			last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
+	uhex		Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
+			instead of using ^C and ~C.
+
+						*'eadirection'* *'ead'*
+'eadirection' 'ead'	string	(default "both")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			feature}
+	Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
+		ver	vertically, width of windows is not affected
+		hor	horizontally, height of windows is not affected
+		both	width and height of windows is affected
+
+			   *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'*
+'edcompatible' 'ed'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+	Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be
+	toggled each time the flag is given.  See |complex-change|.  See
+	also 'gdefault' option.
+	Switching this option on is discouraged!
+
+					*'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
+'encoding' 'enc'	string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
+			global
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Sets the character encoding used inside Vim.  It applies to text in
+	the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the
+	viminfo file, etc.  It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work
+	with.  See |encoding-names| for the possible values.
+
+	NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
+	existing text in Vim.  It may cause multi-byte text to become invalid.
+	It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
+	starts up.  See |multibyte|.
+
+	NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
+	"utf-8".  Although care has been taken to allow different values of
+	'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
+	avoids unnecessary conversion overhead.  "utf-8" has not been made
+	the default to prevent different behaviour of the GUI and terminal
+	versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files
+	without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).
+
+	The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.
+	This is specified with 'fileencoding'.	The conversion is done with
+	iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.
+
+	Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale.  This will
+	be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings.  If
+	'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be
+	set to convert typed and displayed text.  See |encoding-table|.
+
+	When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand
+	event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.
+
+	When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
+	you can set it with uppercase values too.  Underscores are translated
+	to '-' signs.
+	When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.
+	For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes
+	"iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".
+
+	Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.
+	This only works when editing files in the same encoding!  When the
+	actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and
+	'fileencodings' are empty.  When conversion is needed, switch to using
+	utf-8.
+
+	When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.
+	You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the
+	|viminfo-file|.  And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too.  Thus
+	setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
+	effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.
+
+	 When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
+	 not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.
+
+			*'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
+'endofline' 'eol'	boolean	(default on)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
+	is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file.	This
+	option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
+	the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
+	which case it is reset.  Normally you don't have to set or reset this
+	option.  When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
+	file.  When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
+	<EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
+	the situation from the original file can be kept.  But you can change
+	it if you want to.
+
+			     *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
+'equalalways' 'ea'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
+	splitting or closing a window.	When off, splitting a window will
+	reduce the size of the current window and leave the other windows the
+	same.  When closing a window the extra lines are given to the window
+	next to it (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
+	When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
+	is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room.  The
+	'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
+	Changing the height of a window can be avoided by setting
+	'winfixheight'.
+
+						*'equalprg'* *'ep'*
+'equalprg' 'ep'		string	(default "")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	External program to use for "=" command.  When this option is empty
+	the internal formatting functions are used ('lisp', 'cindent' or
+	'indentexpr').
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.	See |option-backslash|
+	about including spaces and backslashes.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+			*'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
+'errorbells' 'eb'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+	Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages.  This only
+	makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
+	for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
+	mode).	See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
+	screen flash or do nothing.
+
+						*'errorfile'* *'ef'*
+'errorfile' 'ef'	string	(Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
+					others: "errors.err")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
+			feature}
+	Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
+	When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
+	following argument.  See |-q|.
+	NOT used for the ":make" command.  See 'makeef' for that.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'errorformat'* *'efm'*
+'errorformat' 'efm'	string	(default is very long)
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
+			feature}
+	Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
+	(see |errorformat|).
+
+				     *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'*
+'esckeys' 'ek'		boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert
+	mode.  When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be
+	used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>.  The advantage of
+	this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of
+	after one second.  Instead of resetting this option, you might want to
+	try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'.  Note that
+	when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys
+	won't work by default.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'eventignore'* *'ei'*
+'eventignore' 'ei'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
+			feature}
+	A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
+	When set to "all", all autocommand events are ignored, autocommands
+	will not be executed.
+	Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names.  Example: >
+	    :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
+<
+				 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
+'expandtab' 'et'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
+	<Tab>.	Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
+	when 'autoindent' is on.  To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
+	on, use CTRL-V<Tab>.  See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+					*'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
+'exrc' 'ex'		boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current
+	directory.  If you switch this option on you should also consider
+	setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|).  Using a local
+	.exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!
+	also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+				*'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
+'fileencoding' 'fenc'	string (default: "")
+			local to buffer
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.
+	When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
+	done when reading and writing the file.
+	When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
+	used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
+		WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information!  When
+		'encoding' is "utf-8" conversion is most likely done in a way
+		that the reverse conversion results in the same text.  When
+		'encoding' is not "utf-8" some characters may be lost!
+	See 'encoding' for the possible values.  Additionally, values may be
+	specified that can be handled by the converter, see
+	|mbyte-conversion|.
+	When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
+	To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
+	'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.
+	Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
+	When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
+	you can set it with uppercase values too.  '_' characters are
+	replaced with '-'.  If a name is recognized from the list for
+	'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name.  For example
+	"ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".
+	When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
+	option is set, because the file would be different when written.
+	If you do this in a modeline, you might want to set 'nomodified' to
+	avoid this.
+	This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
+
+							*'fe'*
+	NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the
+	whole of Vim, this was a mistake.  Now use 'encoding' instead.	The
+	old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.
+
+					*'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
+'fileencodings' 'fencs'	string (default: "ucs-bom", "ucs-bom,utf-8,latin1"
+				    when 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
+			global
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
+	an existing file.  When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
+	mentioned character encoding.  If an error is detected, the next one
+	in the list is tried.  When an encoding is found that works,
+	'fileencoding' is set to it.	If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
+	an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used.
+		WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information!  When
+		'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)
+		conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse
+		conversion results in the same text.  When 'encoding' is not
+		"utf-8" special characters may be lost!
+	For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
+	will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
+	"ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present).  If you prefer
+	another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
+	preferred encoding is to be used.  Example: >
+		au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
+			\ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
+<	This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
+	non-blank characters.
+	Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for an new file, 'fileencoding'
+	is always empty then.  This means that a non-existing file may get a
+	different encoding than an empty file.
+	The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
+	(Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file.  It must not be preceded
+	by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
+	An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
+	because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
+	accepted.
+	WRONG VALUES:			WHAT'S WRONG:
+		latin1,utf-8		"latin1" will always be used
+		utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1	BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
+					file
+		cp1250,latin1		"cp1250" will always be used
+	If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
+	See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
+	Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
+	is read.
+
+					*'fileformat'* *'ff'*
+'fileformat' 'ff'	string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",
+				Unix default: "unix",
+				Macintosh default: "mac")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
+	reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
+	    dos	    <CR> <NL>
+	    unix    <NL>
+	    mac	    <CR>
+	When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
+	See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
+	For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
+	When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
+	works like it was set to "unix'.
+	This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
+	'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
+	When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
+	option is set, because the file would be different when written.
+	This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
+	For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",
+	'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.
+
+					*'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
+'fileformats' 'ffs'	string (default:
+				Vim+Vi	MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",
+				Vim	Unix: "unix,dos",
+				Vim	Mac: "mac,unix,dos",
+				Vi	Cygwin: "unix,dos",
+				Vi	others: "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
+	starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
+	buffer:
+	- When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
+	  always.  It is not set automatically.
+	- When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
+	  is opened.  'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer.	The
+	  'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
+	  buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
+	- When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
+	  <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file.  When starting to
+	  edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
+	  1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
+	     'fileformat' is set to "dos".
+	  2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
+	     is set to "unix".	Note that when a <NL> is found without a
+	     preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
+	  3. If 'fileformats' includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
+	     This means that "mac" is only chosen when "unix" is not present,
+	     or when no <NL> is found in the file, and when "dos" is not
+	     present, or no <CR><NL> is present in the file.
+	     Also if "unix" was first chosen, but the first <CR> is before
+	     the first <NL> and there appears to be more <CR>'s than <NL>'s in
+	     the file, then 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
+	  4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
+	     'fileformats' is used.
+	  When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
+	  this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
+	  file only, the option is not changed.
+	When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.
+
+	For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
+	are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
+	done:
+	- When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection.  Dos
+	  format will be used.
+	- When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
+	  is done.  This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
+	  <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
+	  used.
+	Also see |file-formats|.
+	For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty
+	string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,
+	otherwise 'textauto' is set.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+					*'filetype'* *'ft'*
+'filetype' 'ft'		string (default: "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
+			feature}
+	When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
+	All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
+	executed.  Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
+	name.
+	Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
+	This option is normally set when the file type is detected.  To enable
+	this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
+	Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
+	for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
+	Example, for in an IDL file: >
+		/* vim: set filetype=idl : */
+<	|FileType| |filetypes|
+	Do not confuse this option with 'osfiletype', which is for the file
+	type that is actually stored with the file.
+	This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
+	'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
+
+						*'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
+'fillchars' 'fcs'	string	(default "vert:|,fold:-")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows|
+			and |+folding| features}
+	Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.
+	It is a comma separated list of items:
+
+	  item		default		Used for ~
+	  stl:c		' ' or '^'	statusline of the current window
+	  stlnc:c	' ' or '-'	statusline of the non-current windows
+	  vert:c	'|'		vertical separators |:vsplit|
+	  fold:c	'-'		filling 'foldtext'
+	  diff:c	'-'		deleted lines of the 'diff' option
+
+	Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default.	For "stl" and
+	"stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'
+	otherwise.
+
+	Example: >
+	    :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-
+<	This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
+	be used when there is highlighting.
+
+	The highlighting used for these items:
+	  item		highlight group ~
+	  stl:c		StatusLine		|hl-StatusLine|
+	  stlnc:c	StatusLineNC		|hl-StatusLineNC|
+	  vert:c	VertSplit		|hl-VertSplit|
+	  fold:c	Folded			|hl-Folded|
+	  diff:c	DiffDelete		|hl-DiffDelete|
+
+					*'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
+'fkmap' 'fk'		boolean (default off)			*E198*
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.
+	Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
+	toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|.	See |farsi.txt|.
+
+						*'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
+'foldclose' 'fcl'	string (default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
+	its level is higher than 'foldlevel'.  Useful if you want folds to
+	automatically close when moving out of them.
+
+						*'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
+'foldcolumn' 'fdc'	number (default 0)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side
+	of the window which indicates open and closed folds.  The maximum
+	value is 12.
+	See |folding|.
+
+			*'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
+'foldenable' 'fen'	boolean (default on)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	When off, all folds are open.  This option can be used to quickly
+	switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
+	folds (including manually opened or closed folds).  It can be toggled
+	with the |zi| command.	The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
+	'foldenable' is off.
+	This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
+	See |folding|.
+
+						*'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
+'foldexpr' 'fde'	string (default: "0")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			or |+eval| feature}
+	The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
+	for each line to obtain its fold level.  See |fold-expr|.  Also see
+	|eval-sandbox|.
+
+						*'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
+'foldignore' 'fdi'	string (default: "#")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent".  Lines starting with
+	characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
+	lines.	White space is skipped before checking for this character.
+	The default "#" works well for C programs.  See |fold-indent|.
+
+						*'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
+'foldlevel' 'fdl'	number (default: 0)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
+	Setting this option to zero will close all folds.  Higher numbers will
+	close fewer folds.
+	This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
+	See |fold-foldlevel|.
+
+						*'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
+'foldlevelstart' 'fdls'	number (default: -1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
+	Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
+	some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
+	This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
+	overrules this option.	Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
+	ignores this option and closes all folds.
+	It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
+	overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
+	When the value is negative, it is not used.
+
+						*'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
+'foldmarker' 'fmr'	string (default: "{{{,}}}")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker".  There
+	must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker.  The
+	marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
+	See |fold-marker|.
+
+						*'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
+'foldmethod' 'fdm'	string (default: "manual")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	The kind of folding used for the current window.  Possible values:
+	|fold-manual|	manual	    Folds are created manually.
+	|fold-indent|	indent	    Lines with equal indent form a fold.
+	|fold-expr|	expr	    'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
+	|fold-marker|	marker	    Markers are used to specify folds.
+	|fold-syntax|	syntax	    Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
+	|fold-diff|	diff	    Fold text that is not changed.
+
+						*'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
+'foldminlines' 'fml'	number (default: 1)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	Sets the minimum number of screen lines for a fold to be displayed
+	closed.  Also for manually closed folds.
+	Note that this only has an effect of what is displayed.  After using
+	"zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
+	than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.
+
+						*'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
+'foldnestmax' 'fdn'	number (default: 20)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
+	methods.  This avoids that too many folds will be created.  Using more
+	than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.
+
+						*'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
+'foldopen' 'fdo'	string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,
+							     search,tag,undo")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
+	command moves the cursor into a closed fold.  It is a comma separated
+	list of items.
+		item		commands ~
+		all		any
+		block		"(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.
+		hor		horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
+		insert		any command in Insert mode
+		jump		far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
+		mark		jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
+		percent		"%"
+		quickfix	":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
+		search		search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
+				(not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
+		tag		jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
+		undo		undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
+	When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.	Add
+	the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
+	When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
+	this option is not used.  This means the operator will include the
+	whole closed fold.
+	Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
+	very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
+	In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
+	when text is inserted.
+	To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
+	set the 'foldclose' option to "all".
+
+						*'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
+'foldtext' 'fdt'	string (default: "foldtext()")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+folding|
+			feature}
+	An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
+	fold.  See |fold-foldtext|.
+
+					*'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
+'formatoptions' 'fo'	string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
+	formatting is to be done.  See |fo-table|.  When the 'paste' option is
+	on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty).  Commas can
+	be inserted for readability.
+	To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
+	"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'formatprg'* *'fp'*
+'formatprg' 'fp'	string (default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
+	selected with the "gq" command.  The program must take the input on
+	stdin and produce the output on stdout.  The Unix program "fmt" is
+	such a program.  If this option is an empty string, the internal
+	format function will be used |C-indenting|.  Environment variables are
+	expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
+	and backslashes.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+				   *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
+'gdefault' 'gd'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on.  This means that
+	all matches in a line are substituted instead of one.  When a 'g' flag
+	is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
+	of all or one match.  See |complex-change|.
+
+		command		'gdefault' on	'gdefault' off	~
+		:s///		  subst. all	  subst. one
+		:s///g		  subst. one	  subst. all
+		:s///gg		  subst. all	  subst. one
+
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
+'grepformat' 'gfm'	string	(default "%f:%l%m,%f  %l%m")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
+	This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
+	'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.
+
+						*'grepprg'* *'gp'*
+'grepprg' 'gp'		string	(default "grep -n ",
+					Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",
+					Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",
+						      VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	Program to use for the ":grep" command. This option may contain '%'
+	and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
+	line.  The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
+	will be included.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See
+	|option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+	When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
+	also work well with a single file: >
+		:set grepprg=grep\ -nH
+<	See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
+	apply equally to 'grepprg'.
+	For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
+	otherwise it's "grep -n".
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+			*'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
+'guicursor' 'gcr'	string	(default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,
+					ve:ver35-Cursor,
+					o:hor50-Cursor,
+					i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,
+					r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,
+					sm:block-Cursor
+					-blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",
+				for MS-DOS and Win32 console:
+					"n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,
+					r-cr:hor30,sm:block")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and
+			for MS-DOS and Win32 console}
+	This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different
+	modes.	It fully works in the GUI.  In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only
+	the height of the cursor can be changed.  This can be done by
+	specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
+	horizontal cursor.
+
+	The option is a comma separated list of parts.	Each part consist of a
+	mode-list and an argument-list:
+		mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
+	The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
+		n	Normal mode
+		v	Visual mode
+		ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
+			if not specified)
+		o	Operator-pending mode
+		i	Insert mode
+		r	Replace mode
+		c	Command-line Normal (append) mode
+		ci	Command-line Insert mode
+		cr	Command-line Replace mode
+		sm	showmatch in Insert mode
+		a	all modes
+	The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
+		hor{N}	horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
+		ver{N}	vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
+		block	block cursor, fills the whole character
+			[only one of the above three should be present]
+		blinkwait{N}				*cursor-blinking*
+		blinkon{N}
+		blinkoff{N}
+			blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
+			the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
+			the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
+			cursor is not shown.  The times are in msec.  When one
+			of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking.  The
+			default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".
+			These numbers are used for a missing entry.  This
+			means that blinking is enabled by default.  To switch
+			blinking off you can use "blinkon0".  The cursor only
+			blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while
+			executing a command.
+			To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see
+			|xterm-blink|.
+		{group-name}
+			a highlight group name, that sets the color and font
+			for the cursor
+		{group-name}/{group-name}
+			Two highlight group names, the first is used when
+			no language mappings are used, the other when they
+			are. |language-mapping|
+
+	Examples of parts:
+	   n-c-v:block-nCursor	in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
+				block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
+				highlight group
+	   i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
+				In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
+				30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
+				"iCursor" highlight group.  Blink a bit
+				faster.
+
+	The 'a' mode is different.  It will set the given argument-list for
+	all modes.  It does not reset anything to defaults.  This can be used
+	to do a common setting for all modes.  For example, to switch off
+	blinking: "a:blinkon0"
+
+	Examples of cursor highlighting: >
+	    :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
+	    :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
+<
+					*'guifont'* *'gfn'*
+						   *E235* *E596* *E610* *E611*
+'guifont' 'gfn'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
+	This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
+	In its simplest form the value is just one font name.  When
+	the font cannot be found you will get an error message.  To try other
+	font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
+	The first valid font is used.
+	When 'guifontset' is not empty, 'guifont' is not used.
+	Spaces after a comma are ignored.  To include a comma in a font name
+	precede it with a backslash.  Setting an option requires an extra
+	backslash before a space and a backslash.  See also
+	|option-backslash|.  For example: >
+	    :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
+<	will make vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
+	will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.
+	For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: >
+	    :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
+<	That's all.  XLFDs are no longer accepted.
+								*E236*
+	Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
+	width).
+	To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
+	program.  The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.
+	For Win32, GTK and Photon only: >
+	    :set guifont=*
+<	will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.
+	If none of the fonts can be loaded, vim will keep the current setting.
+	If an empty font list is given, vim will try using other resource
+	settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
+	will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
+	the case of X).  The font names given should be "normal" fonts.  Vim
+	will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.
+	For the Win32 GUI					*E244* *E245*
+	- takes these options in the font name:
+		hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
+		wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
+		b   - bold
+		i   - italic
+		u   - underline
+		s   - strikeout
+		cXX - character set XX. valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
+		      BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
+		      HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
+		      SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
+
+	  Use a ':' to separate the options.
+	- A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
+	  backslashes to escape the spaces.
+	- Examples: >
+	    :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
+	    :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
+<	See also |font-sizes|.
+
+					*'guifontset'* *'gfs'*
+					*E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598*
+'guifontset' 'gfs'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
+			with the |+xfontset| feature}
+			{not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
+	When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used.  The first
+	one for normal English, the second one for your special language.  See
+	|xfontset|.
+	Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as
+	a fontset name.  Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
+	|:highlight| command.
+	The fonts must match with the current locale.  If fonts for the
+	character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting
+	'guifontset' will fail.
+	Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
+	the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
+	used.  In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
+	including the commas.  It is not possible to specify alternative
+	fontset names.
+	This example works on many X11 systems: >
+		:set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
+<
+				*'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
+'guifontwide' 'gfw'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
+	When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used
+	for double-width characters.  The first font that can be loaded is
+	used.
+	Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
+	specified with 'guifont' and the same height.
+
+	All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:
+
+	'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
+	'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
+	When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
+	'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
+	double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.
+
+	GTK+ 2 GUI only:			*guifontwide_gtk2*
+
+	If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
+	characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
+	Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
+	automatically.	If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
+	font for characters not available in 'guifont'.  Thus you do not need
+	to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
+	made by Pango/Xft.
+
+						*'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
+'guiheadroom' 'ghr'	number	(default 50)
+			global
+			{not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI}
+	The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting
+	the GUI window on the screen.  Set this before the GUI is started,
+	e.g., in your |gvimrc| file.  When zero, the whole screen height will
+	be used by the window.	When positive, the specified number of pixel
+	lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the
+	screen.  Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the
+	screen.
+
+						*'guioptions'* *'go'*
+'guioptions' 'go'	string	(default "gmrLtT"   (MS-Windows),
+					 "agimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
+	This option only has an effect in the GUI version of vim.  It is a
+	sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
+	GUI should be used.
+	To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
+	"+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
+
+	Valid letters are as follows:
+							*guioptions_a*
+	  'a'	Autoselect:  If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
+		or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
+		the windowing system's global selection.  This means that the
+		Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
+		applications as well as into Vim itself.  When the Visual mode
+		ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
+		application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
+		is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
+		Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
+		applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
+		    If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
+		windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
+		by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
+		The same applies to the modeless selection.
+
+	  'A'	Autoselect for the modeless selection.	Like 'a', but only
+		applies to the modeless selection.
+
+		    'guioptions'   autoselect Visual  autoselect modeless ~
+			 ""		 -			 -
+			 "a"		yes			yes
+			 "A"		 -			yes
+			 "aA"		yes			yes
+
+	  'c'	Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
+		choices.
+
+	  'f'	Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
+		where it was started.  Use this for programs that wait for the
+		editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program).  Alternatively you
+		can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
+		foreground.  |gui-fork|
+		Note: Set this option in the vimrc file.  The forking may have
+		happened already when the gvimrc file is read.
+
+	  'i'	Use a Vim icon.  For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
+		corner of the window.  It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
+		limitations of X11.  For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
+
+	  'm'	Menu bar is present.
+	  'M'	The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced.	Note
+		that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
+		switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the .gvimrc
+		file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
+		":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
+	  'g'	Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
+		'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
+		Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
+
+	  't'	Include tearoff menu items.  Currently only works for Win32,
+		GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
+	  'T'	Include Toolbar.  Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, and
+		Athena GUIs.
+
+	  'r'	Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
+	  'R'	Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
+		split window.
+	  'l'	Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
+	  'L'	Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
+		split window.
+	  'b'	Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present.  Its size depends on
+		the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
+		flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
+	  'h'	Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
+		line.  Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|
+
+	And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
+	you really want to :-).  See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.
+
+	  'v'	Use a vertical button layout for dialogs.  When not included,
+		a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
+		vertical layout is used anyway.
+	  'p'	Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI.  This is required for some
+		window managers.  If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
+		the right moment, try adding this flag.  This must be done
+		before starting the GUI.  Set it in your gvimrc.  Adding or
+		removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
+	  'F'	Add a footer.  Only for Motif.	See |gui-footer|.
+
+						*'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
+'guipty'		boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
+	Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for
+	I/O to/from shell commands.  See |gui-pty|.
+
+						*'helpfile'* *'hf'*
+'helpfile' 'hf'		string	(default (MSDOS)  "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
+					 (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Name of the main help file.  All distributed help files should be
+	placed together in one directory.  Additionally, all "doc" directories
+	in 'runtimepath' will be used.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  For example:
+	"$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt".  If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
+	tried.	Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
+	spaces and backslashes.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'helpheight'* *'hh'*
+'helpheight' 'hh'	number	(default 20)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			feature}
+	Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
+	":help" command.  The initial height of the help window is half of the
+	current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
+	windows.  When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
+	set to 'helpheight'.  Set to zero to disable.
+
+						*'helplang'* *'hlg'*
+'helplang' 'hlg'	string	(default: messages language or empty)
+			global
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Comma separated list of languages.  Vim will use the first language
+	for which the desired help can be found.  The English help will always
+	be used as a last resort.  You can add "en" to prefer English over
+	another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
+	language and not in the English help.
+	Example: >
+		:set helplang=de,it
+<	This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
+	files.
+	When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
+	try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
+	See |help-translated|.
+
+				     *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
+'hidden' 'hid'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed.  When on a
+	buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed.  If the buffer is still
+	displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.
+	The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer
+	hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is
+	modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'
+	flag was used.	See also |windows.txt|.
+	This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
+	WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.
+	Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".
+
+						*'highlight'* *'hl'*
+'highlight' 'hl'	string	(default (as a single string):
+				     "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
+				     e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
+				     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
+				     s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit
+				     t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
+				     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
+				     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
+				     >:SignColumn")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
+	occasions.  It is a comma separated list of character pairs.  The
+	first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
+	use for that occasion.	The occasions are:
+	|hl-SpecialKey|	 8  Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
+	|hl-NonText|	 @  '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
+			    characters from 'showbreak'
+	|hl-Directory|	 d  directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
+			    things in listings
+	|hl-ErrorMsg|	 e  error messages
+			 h  (obsolete, ignored)
+	|hl-IncSearch|	 i  'incsearch' highlighting
+	|hl-Search|	 l  last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
+	|hl-MoreMsg|	 m  |more-prompt|
+	|hl-ModeMsg|	 M  Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
+	|hl-LineNr|	 n  line number for ":number" and ":#" commands
+	|hl-Question|	 r  |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
+	|hl-StatusLine|	 s  status line of current window |status-line|
+	|hl-StatusLineNC| S  status lines of not-current windows
+	|hl-Title|	 t  Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
+	|hl-VertSplit|	 c  column used to separate vertically split windows
+	|hl-Visual|	 v  Visual mode
+	|hl-VisualNOS|	 V  Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the
+			    Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and
+			    |xterm-clipboard|.
+	|hl-WarningMsg|	 w  warning messages
+	|hl-WildMenu|	 W  wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
+	|hl-Folded|	 f  line used for closed folds
+	|hl-FoldColumn|	 F  'foldcolumn'
+	|hl-SignColumn|	 >  column used for |signs|
+
+	The display modes are:
+		r	reverse		(termcap entry "mr" and "me")
+		i	italic		(termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")
+		b	bold		(termcap entry "md" and "me")
+		s	standout	(termcap entry "so" and "se")
+		u	underline	(termcap entry "us" and "ue")
+		n	no highlighting
+		-	no highlighting
+		:	use a highlight group
+	The default is used for occasions that are not included.
+	If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors|
+	for an example.
+	When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of
+	a highlight group.  A highlight group can be used to define any type
+	of highlighting, including using color.  See |:highlight| on how to
+	define one.  The default uses a different group for each occasion.
+	See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups.
+
+				 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
+'hlsearch' 'hls'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+extra_search| feature}
+	When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
+	The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the
+	'highlight' option.  This uses the "Search" highlight group by
+	default.  Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
+	are not applied.
+	See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
+	When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
+	off with |:nohlsearch|.  As soon as you use a search command, the
+	highlighting comes back.
+	When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
+	highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
+	search starts.	This will be the first line in the window or the first
+	line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
+	drawn may not continue in an newly drawn line.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'history'* *'hi'*
+'history' 'hi'		number	(Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
+	are remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
+	each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+					 *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'*
+'hkmap' 'hk'		boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.
+	Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
+	toggle this option.  See |rileft.txt|.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+				 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'*
+'hkmapp' 'hkp'		boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used.  'hkmap' must also be on.
+	This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.
+	See |rileft.txt|.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'icon'* *'noicon'*
+'icon'			boolean	(default off, on when title can be restored)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+title|
+			feature}
+	When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
+	'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
+	currently being edited.  Only the last part of the name is used.
+	Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
+	Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently
+	only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are
+	Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the
+	builtin termcap).
+	When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
+	restored if possible |X11|. See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on
+	X11.
+
+						*'iconstring'*
+'iconstring'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+title|
+			feature}
+	When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
+	the window.  This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
+	Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
+	(currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).
+	Does not work for MS Windows.
+	When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
+	restored if possible |X11|.
+	When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
+	expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.	See
+	'titlestring' for example settings.
+	{not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
+
+			*'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
+'ignorecase' 'ic'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+	Ignore case in search patterns.  Also used when searching in the tags
+	file.
+	Also see 'smartcase'.
+	Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
+	|/ignorecase|.
+
+						*'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
+'imactivatekey' 'imak'	string (default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with |+xim| and
+			|+GUI_GTK|}
+	Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
+	activation.  When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
+	IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
+	You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option
+	tells Vim what the key is.
+	Format:
+		[MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING
+
+	These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):
+		S	    Shift key
+		L	    Lock key
+		C	    Control key
+		1	    Mod1 key
+		2	    Mod2 key
+		3	    Mod3 key
+		4	    Mod4 key
+		5	    Mod5 key
+	Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are
+	both shift+ctrl+space.
+	See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.
+
+	Example: >
+		:set imactivatekey=S-space
+<	"S-space" means shift+space.  This is the activation key for kinput2 +
+	canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).
+
+				*'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'*
+'imcmdline' 'imc'	boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|
+			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
+	When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
+	line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
+	Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
+	English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
+	characters with dead keys.
+
+				*'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'nodisable'* *'noimd'*
+'imdisable' 'imd'	boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+xim|
+			|+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| feature}
+	When set the Input Method is never used.  This is useful to disable
+	the IM when it doesn't work properly.
+	Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines.  This
+	may change in later releases.
+
+						*'iminsert'* *'imi'*
+'iminsert' 'imi'	number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
+	Insert mode.  Valid values:
+		0	:lmap is off and IM is off
+		1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
+		2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
+	2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
+	or |global-ime|.
+	To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
+	this can be used: >
+		:inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
+<	This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
+	mode.
+	Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
+	|i_CTRL-^|.
+	The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
+	It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
+	The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
+	methods.  Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
+
+						*'imsearch'* *'ims'*
+'imsearch' 'ims'	number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
+	entering a search pattern.  Valid values:
+		-1	the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
+			'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
+		0	:lmap is off and IM is off
+		1	:lmap is ON and IM is off
+		2	:lmap is off and IM is ON
+	Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
+	|c_CTRL-^|.
+	The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
+	option to a valid keymap name.
+	The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
+	methods.  Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.
+
+						*'include'* *'inc'*
+'include' 'inc'		string	(default "^\s*#\s*include")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+find_in_path| feature}
+	Pattern to be used to find an include command.	It is a search
+	pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|).  The default
+	value is for C programs.  This option is used for the commands "[i",
+	"]I", "[d", etc..  The 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file
+	name that comes after the matched pattern.  See |option-backslash|
+	about including spaces and backslashes.
+
+						*'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
+'includeexpr' 'inex'	string	(default "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+find_in_path| or |+eval| feature}
+	Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
+	option to a file name.	Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
+		:set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
+<	The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.
+	Evaluated in the |sandbox|.
+	Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
+	found.	Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
+	Also used for |<cfile>|.
+
+				 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
+'incsearch' 'is'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+extra_search| feature}
+	While typing a search command, show immediately where the so far
+	typed pattern matches.	The matched string is highlighted.  If the
+	pattern is invalid or not found, nothing is shown.  The screen will
+	be updated often, this is only useful on fast terminals.  Note that
+	the match will be shown, but the cursor is not actually positioned
+	there.	You still need to finish the search command with <CR> to move
+	the cursor.  The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in
+	'highlight'.  See also: 'hlsearch'.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
+'indentexpr' 'inde'	string	(default "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
+			or |+eval| features}
+	Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
+	It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
+	in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
+	When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
+	'smartindent' indenting.
+	When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.
+	The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
+	which the indent is to be computed.  The cursor is also as this line
+	when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).
+	The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent.  It
+	can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
+	used for the indent).
+	Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
+	and |lispindent()|.
+	The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!  It must
+	not change the text, jump to another window, etc.  Afterwards the
+	cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
+	Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
+		:set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
+<	Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
+	"msg".
+	See |indent-expression|.  Also see |eval-sandbox|.
+	NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
+'indentkeys' 'indk'	string	(default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
+			feature}
+	A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
+	the current line.  Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
+	The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
+	See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.
+
+			*'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
+'infercase' 'inf'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
+	'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted.  If the
+	typed text contains a lowercase letter where the match has an upper
+	case letter, the completed part is made lowercase.  If the typed text
+	has no lowercase letters and the match has a lowercase letter where
+	the typed text has an uppercase letter, and there is a letter before
+	it, the completed part is made uppercase.
+
+			*'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'*
+'insertmode' 'im'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode.  Useful
+	if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor.  Used for |evim|.
+	These Insert mode commands will be useful:
+	- Use the cursor keys to move around.
+	- Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|).  When
+	  this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
+	  Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
+								*i_CTRL-L*
+	- Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
+	  <Esc> to get back to Insert mode.
+
+	These items change when 'insertmode' is set:
+	- when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.
+	- <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.
+	- <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.
+	- CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.
+	- CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|.	*i_CTRL-Z*
+	However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like
+	'insertmode' was not set.  This was done to be able to use the same
+	mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.
+	When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used.
+
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'isfname'* *'isf'*
+'isfname' 'isf'		string	(default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
+			     "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="
+			    for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"
+			    for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"
+			    for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
+			    otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
+	path names.  Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
+	the tags file.	It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
+	Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
+	characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
+	For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
+
+	Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
+	do its best to make it work as you would expect.  That is a bit
+	tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
+	characters.  Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
+	name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes.  The
+	'&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
+	cmd.exe.
+
+	The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
+	Each part can be a single character number or a range.	A range is two
+	character numbers with '-' in between.	A character number can be a
+	decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
+	not work for digits).  Example:
+		"_,-,128-140,#-43"	(include '_' and '-' and the range
+					128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
+	If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
+	will be excluded from the option.  The option is interpreted from left
+	to right.  Put the excluded character after the range where it is
+	included.  To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
+	option or the end of a range.  Example:
+		"^a-z,#,^"	(exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
+	If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
+	are included.  Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
+	plus accented characters.  To include '@' itself use "@-@".  Examples:
+		"@,^a-z"	All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
+				case letters.
+		"a-z,A-Z,@-@"	All letters plus the '@' character.
+	A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
+	expected.  Example:
+		"48-57,,,_"	Digits, comma and underscore.
+	A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'.  Example:
+		" -~,^,,9"	All characters from space to '~', excluding
+				comma, plus <Tab>.
+	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+
+						*'isident'* *'isi'*
+'isident' 'isi'		string	(default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
+					   "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
+				otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
+	Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
+	match of the 'define' option.  It is also used for "\i" in a
+	|pattern|. See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
+	option.
+	Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
+	environment variables.	E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
+	expand "$HOME/.viminfo".  Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.
+
+						*'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
+'iskeyword' 'isk'	string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:
+					    "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
+				   otherwise:  "@,48-57,_,192-255"
+				Vi default: "@,48-57,_")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
+	"w", "*", "[i", etc.  It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|.	See
+	'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.  For C
+	programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
+	For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
+	'*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
+	command).
+	When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'isprint'* *'isp'*
+'isprint' 'isp'	string	(default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:
+				"@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
+	screen.  It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|.  The characters from
+	space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
+	even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded.  See
+	'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.
+
+	Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
+		  0 -  31	"^@" - "^_"
+		 32 - 126	always single characters
+		   127		"^?"
+		128 - 159	"~@" - "~_"
+		160 - 254	"| " - "|~"
+		   255		"~?"
+	When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are
+	displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
+	When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
+	displayed as <xx>.
+	The NonText highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
+	|hl-NonText|
+
+	Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
+	characters up to 255 are specified with this option.  When a character
+	is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
+	replacement character will be shown.
+	Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
+	There is no option to specify these characters.
+
+			*'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
+'joinspaces' 'js'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
+	When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.
+	Otherwise only one space is inserted.
+	NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
+
+							*'key'*
+'key'			string	(default "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
+	See |encryption|.
+	Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
+	key.  Use the |:X| command.  But you can make 'key' empty: >
+		:set key=
+<	It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or
+	"echo &key".  This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't
+	know.  It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,
+	be careful not to make a typing error!
+
+					*'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544*
+'keymap' 'kmp'		string	(default "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+keymap|
+			feature}
+	Name of a keyboard mapping.  See |mbyte-keymap|.
+	Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
+	setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
+	'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
+
+					*'keymodel'* *'km'*
+'keymodel' 'km'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys
+	can do.  These values can be used:
+	   startsel	Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
+			Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
+			present in 'selectmode').
+	   stopsel	Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
+	Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
+	<PageUp> and <PageDown>.
+	The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
+
+					*'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
+'keywordprg' 'kp'	string	(default "man" or "man -s",  DOS: ":help",
+						OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	Program to use for the |K| command.  Environment variables are
+	expanded |:set_env|.  ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
+	help.  (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
+	value did this, which is now deprecated.)
+	When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
+	"K" command to a section number.  Also for "man -s", in which case the
+	"-s" is removed when there is no count.
+	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+	Example: >
+		:set keywordprg=man\ -s
+<	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+					*'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
+'langmap' 'lmap'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
+			feature}
+	This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
+	mode.	When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
+	inserted directly.  When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
+	care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
+	of the key.  This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
+	be able to execute Normal mode commands.
+	This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
+	mapped in Insert mode.
+	This only works for 8-bit characters.  The value of 'langmap' may be
+	specified with multi-byte characters (e.g., UTF-8), but only the lower
+	8 bits of each character will be used.
+
+	Example (for Greek):					*greek*  >
+	    :set langmap=ÁA,ÂB,ØC,ÄD,ÅE,ÖF,ÃG,ÇH,ÉI,ÎJ,ÊK,ËL,ÌM,ÍN,ÏO,ÐP,QQ,ÑR,ÓS,ÔT,ÈU,ÙV,WW,×X,ÕY,ÆZ,áa,âb,øc,äd,åe,öf,ãg,çh,éi,îj,êk,ël,ìm,ín,ïo,ðp,qq,ñr,ós,ôt,èu,ùv,òw,÷x,õy,æz
+<	Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
+	    :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
+<
+	The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas.  Each
+	part can be in one of two forms:
+	1.  A list of pairs.  Each pair is a "from" character immediately
+	    followed by the "to" character.  Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
+	2.  A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
+	    characters.  Example: "abc;ABC"
+	Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
+	Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash.  These are
+	";", ',' and backslash itself.
+
+	This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
+	back and forth between the languages.  Your language characters will
+	be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
+	langmap mappings) in the following cases:
+	 o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
+	 o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
+	 o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
+	Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
+	this option.   Note that this option can be changed at any time
+	allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
+	Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!
+
+					*'langmenu'* *'lm'*
+'langmenu' 'lm'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+menu| and
+			|+multi_lang| features}
+	Language to use for menu translation.  Tells which file is loaded
+	from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
+		"lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"
+<	(without the spaces).  For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
+	matter what $LANG is set to: >
+		:set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
+<	When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
+	If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
+	the English menus: >
+		:set langmenu=none
+<	This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
+	detection or syntax highlighting.  Once the menus are defined setting
+	this option has no effect.  But you could do this: >
+		:source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
+		:set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
+		:source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
+<	Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!
+
+					*'laststatus'* *'ls'*
+'laststatus' 'ls'	number	(default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
+	status line:
+		0: never
+		1: only if there are at least two windows
+		2: always
+	The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
+	windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|
+
+			*'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
+'lazyredraw' 'lz'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
+	executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
+	typed.	Also, updating the window title is postponed.  To force an
+	update use |:redraw|.
+
+			*'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
+'linebreak' 'lbr'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the  |+linebreak|
+			feature}
+	If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
+	than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
+	'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
+	it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.  The
+	value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.
+	This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
+	Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
+	with the right amount of white space.
+
+						*'lines'* *E593*
+'lines'			number	(default 24 or terminal height)
+			global
+	Number of lines of the Vim window.
+	Normally you don't need to set this.  It is done automatically by the
+	terminal initialization code.
+	When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
+	option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
+	to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
+	Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen.  You can
+	use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
+		:set lines=999
+<	If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
+	When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
+	number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.
+
+						*'linespace'* *'lsp'*
+'linespace' 'lsp'	number	(default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only in the GUI}
+	Number of pixel lines inserted between characters.  Useful if the font
+	uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
+	When non-zero there is room for underlining.
+
+						*'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
+'lisp'			boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
+			feature}
+	Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
+	the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of).  Also happens with
+	"cc" or "S".  'autoindent' must also be on for this to work.  The 'p'
+	flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
+	better.  Also see 'lispwords'.
+	The '-' character is included in keyword characters.  Redefines the
+	"=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
+	calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
+	This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
+	{Vi: Does it a little bit differently}
+
+						*'lispwords'* *'lw'*
+'lispwords' 'lw'	string	(default is very long)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
+			feature}
+	Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.
+	|'lisp'|
+
+						*'list'* *'nolist'*
+'list'			boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+	List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I, show end of line with $.  Useful to
+	see the difference between tabs and spaces and for trailing blanks.
+	Note that this will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth' or
+	'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'.  See 'listchars' for
+	changing the way tabs are displayed.
+
+						*'listchars'* *'lcs'*
+'listchars' 'lcs'	string	(default "eol:$")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Strings to use in 'list' mode.	It is a comma separated list of string
+	settings.
+	  eol:c		Character to show at the end of each line.  When
+			omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
+			line.
+	  tab:xy	Two characters to be used to show a Tab.  The first
+			char is used once.  The second char is repeated to
+			fill the space that the Tab normally occupies.
+			"tab:>-" will show a Tab that takes four spaces as
+			">---".  When omitted, a Tab is show as ^I.
+	  trail:c	Character to show for trailing spaces.	When omitted,
+			trailing spaces are blank.
+	  extends:c	Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
+			off and the line continues beyond the right of the
+			screen.
+	  precedes:c	Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
+			is off and there is text preceding the character
+			visible in the first column.
+
+	The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.	UTF-8 characters can
+	be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
+	characters are allowed.
+
+	Examples: >
+	    :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
+	    :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<
+	    :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
+<	The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
+	"precedes".  "SpecialKey" for "tab" and "trail".
+
+			*'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
+'loadplugins' 'lpl'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
+	This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
+	of plugins.
+	Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
+	reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|
+
+						*'magic'* *'nomagic'*
+'magic'			boolean	(default on)
+			global
+	Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
+	See |pattern|.
+	NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep
+	this option at the default "on".  Only switch it off when working with
+	old Vi scripts.  In any other situation write patterns that work when
+	'magic' is on.
+
+						*'makeef'* *'mef'*
+'makeef' 'mef'		string	(default: "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
+			feature}
+	Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
+	and the |:grep| command.
+	When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
+	When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
+	unique.  This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
+	existing file.
+	NOT used for the ":cf" command.  See 'errorfile' for that.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'makeprg'* *'mp'*
+'makeprg' 'mp'		string	(default "make", VMS: "MMS")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.  This
+	option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded like
+	when used in a command-line.  Environment variables are expanded
+	|:set_env|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces and
+	backslashes.  Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set"
+	and once for the interpretation of a command.  When you use a filter
+	called "myfilter" do it like this: >
+	    :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
+<	The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
+	where the arguments will be included, for example: >
+	    :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
+<	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
+'matchpairs' 'mps'	string	(default "(:),{:},[:]")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Characters that form pairs.  The |%| command jumps from one to the
+	other.	Currently only single character pairs are allowed, and they
+	must be different.  The characters must be separated by a colon.  The
+	pairs must be separated by a comma.  Example for including '<' and '>'
+	(HTML): >
+		:set mps+=<:>
+
+<	A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
+	assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
+		:au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;
+
+<	For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
+	the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|
+
+						*'matchtime'* *'mat'*
+'matchtime' 'mat'	number	(default 5)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}{in Nvi}
+	Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
+	set.  Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
+	set a time.  This is to be compatible with Nvi.
+
+						*'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
+'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd'	number	(default 100)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Maximum depth of function calls for user functions.  This normally
+	catches endless recursion.  When using a recursive function with
+	more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number.  But this will use
+	more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
+	See also |:function|.
+
+						*'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
+'maxmapdepth' 'mmd'	number	(default 1000)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
+	character to be used.  This normally catches endless mappings, like
+	":map x y" with ":map y x".  It still does not catch ":map g wg",
+	because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done.  See also
+	|key-mapping|.
+
+						*'maxmem'* *'mm'*
+'maxmem' 'mm'		number	(default between 256 to 5120 (system
+				 dependent) or half the amount of memory
+				 available)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer.  When this
+	limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
+	other memory to be freed.  Maximum value 2000000.  Use this to work
+	without a limit.  Also see 'maxmemtot'.
+
+						*'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'*
+'maxmemtot' 'mmt'	number	(default between 2048 and 10240 (system
+				 dependent) or half the amount of memory
+				 available)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for all buffers together.
+	Maximum value 2000000.	Use this to work without a limit.  Also see
+	'maxmem'.
+
+						*'menuitems'* *'mis'*
+'menuitems' 'mis'	number	(default 25)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+menu|
+			feature}
+	Maximum number of items to use in a menu.  Used for menus that are
+	generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu.  Changing this
+	option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.
+
+				   *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
+'modeline' 'ml'		boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
+			local to buffer
+						*'modelines'* *'mls'*
+'modelines' 'mls'	number	(default 5)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
+	checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
+	no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.
+	NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+				*'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'*
+'modifiable' 'ma'	boolean	(default on)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}		*E21*
+	When off the buffer contents cannot be changed.  The 'fileformat' and
+	'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
+	Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument.
+
+				*'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
+'modified' 'mod'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, the buffer is considered to be modified.  This option is set
+	when:
+	1. A change was made to the text since it was last written.  Using the
+	   |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
+	   option.  But undoing changes that were made before writing the
+	   buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
+	   when it was written.
+	2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
+	   value.  The original value is set when the buffer is read or
+	   written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
+	   values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
+	   reset.
+	When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
+	will be ignored.
+
+						*'more'* *'nomore'*
+'more'			boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled.  You will get
+	the |more-prompt|.  When this option is off there are no pauses, the
+	listing continues until finished.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'mouse'* *E538*
+'mouse'			string	(default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Enable the use of the mouse.  Only works for certain terminals
+	(xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, and Linux console
+	with gpm).  For using the mouse in the GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
+	The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
+		n	Normal mode
+		v	Visual mode
+		i	Insert mode
+		c	Command-line mode
+		h	all previous modes when editing a help file
+		a	all previous modes
+		r	for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
+		A	auto-select in Visual mode
+	Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
+		:set mouse=a
+<	When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
+	modeless selection.  This doesn't move the text cursor.
+
+	See |mouse-using|.  Also see |'clipboard'|.
+
+	Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
+	"* register if there is access to an X-server.	The xterm handling of
+	the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.
+	Also see the 'clipboard' option.
+
+			*'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
+'mousefocus' 'mousef'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only works in the GUI}
+	The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
+	When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
+	mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus.  Off is the
+	default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
+	a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.
+
+			*'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
+'mousehide' 'mh'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only works in the GUI}
+	When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
+	The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.
+
+						*'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
+'mousemodel' 'mousem'	string	(default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Sets the model to use for the mouse.  The name mostly specifies what
+	the right mouse button is used for:
+	   extend	Right mouse button extends a selection.  This works
+			like in an xterm.
+	   popup	Right mouse button pops up a menu.  The shifted left
+			mouse button extends a selection.  This works like
+			with Microsoft Windows
+	   popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
+			position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
+			selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
+			If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
+			be acted upon, ie. no cursor move.  This implies of
+			course, that right clicking outside a selection will
+			end Visual mode.
+	Overview of what button does what for each model:
+	mouse		    extend		popup(_setpos) ~
+	left click	    place cursor	place cursor
+	left drag	    start selection	start selection
+	shift-left	    search word		extend selection
+	right click	    extend selection	popup menu (place cursor)
+	right drag	    extend selection	-
+	middle click	    paste		paste
+
+	In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
+	You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.
+
+	Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
+	See |gui-mouse-mapping|.  But mappings are NOT used for modeless
+	selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).
+
+	The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.
+
+					*'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547*
+'mouseshape' 'mouses'	string	(default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
+					m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow"
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape|
+			feature}
+	This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
+	different modes.  The option is a comma separated list of parts, much
+	like used for 'guicursor'.  Each part consist of a mode/location-list
+	and an argument-list:
+		mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
+	The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
+			In a normal window: ~
+		n	Normal mode
+		v	Visual mode
+		ve	Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
+			if not specified)
+		o	Operator-pending mode
+		i	Insert mode
+		r	Replace mode
+
+			Others: ~
+		c	appending to the command-line
+		ci	inserting in the command-line
+		cr	replacing in the command-line
+		m	at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
+		ml	idem, but cursor in the last line
+		e	any mode, pointer below last window
+		s	any mode, pointer on a status line
+		sd	any mode, while dragging a status line
+		vs	any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
+		vd	any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
+		a	everywhere
+
+	The shape is one of the following:
+	avail	name		looks like ~
+	w x	arrow		Normal mouse pointer
+	w x	blank		no pointer at all (use with care!)
+	w x	beam		I-beam
+	w x	updown		up-down sizing arrows
+	w x	leftright	left-right sizing arrows
+	w x	busy		The system's usual busy pointer
+	w x	no		The system's usual 'no input' pointer
+	  x	udsizing	indicates up-down resizing
+	  x	lrsizing	indicates left-right resizing
+	  x	crosshair	like a big thin +
+	  x	hand1		black hand
+	  x	hand2		white hand
+	  x	pencil		what you write with
+	  x	question	big ?
+	  x	rightup-arrow	arrow pointing right-up
+	w x	up-arrow	arrow pointing up
+	  x	<number>	any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)
+
+	The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
+	x for X11.
+	Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
+	pointer.
+
+	Example: >
+		:set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
+<	will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
+	indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
+	clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)
+
+						*'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
+'mousetime' 'mouset'	number	(default 500)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm.  Defines the maximum
+	time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
+	recognized as a multi click.
+
+							*'nrformats'* *'nf'*
+'nrformats' 'nf'	string	(default "octal,hex")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
+	CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
+	respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
+	alpha	if included, single alphabetical characters will be
+		incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
+		letter index a), b), etc.
+	octal	if included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
+		to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
+	hex	if included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
+		considered to be hexadecimal.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
+		"0x100" results in "0x0ff".
+	Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
+	considered decimal.  This also happens for numbers that are not
+	recognized as octal or hex.
+
+				*'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
+'number' 'nu'		boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+	Print the line number in front of each line.  When the 'n' option is
+	excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
+	line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).
+	When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
+	characters are put before the number.
+	See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
+
+					*'osfiletype'* *'oft'* *E366*
+'osfiletype' 'oft'	string (RISC-OS default: "Text",
+				others default: "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+osfiletype|
+			feature}
+	Some operating systems store extra information about files besides
+	name, datestamp and permissions.  This option contains the extra
+	information, the nature of which will vary between systems.
+	The value of this option is usually set when the file is loaded, and
+	use to set the file type when file is written.
+	It can affect the pattern matching of the automatic commands.
+	|autocmd-osfiletypes|
+
+						*'paragraphs'* *'para'*
+'paragraphs' 'para'	string	(default "IPLPPPQPP LIpplpipbp")
+			global
+	Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs.  These are pairs
+	of two letters (see |object-motions|).
+
+						*'paste'* *'nopaste'*
+'paste'			boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Put Vim in Paste mode.	This is useful if you want to cut or copy
+	some text from one window and paste it in Vim.	This will avoid
+	unexpected effects.
+	Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim
+	cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text.	In the GUI, Vim
+	knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'
+	being set.  The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the
+	mouse clicks itself.
+	When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
+		- mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
+		- abbreviations are disabled
+		- 'textwidth' is set to 0
+		- 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
+		- 'autoindent' is reset
+		- 'smartindent' is reset
+		- 'softtabstop' is set to 0
+		- 'revins' is reset
+		- 'ruler' is reset
+		- 'showmatch' is reset
+		- 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
+	These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
+		- 'lisp'
+		- 'indentexpr'
+		- 'cindent'
+	NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
+	on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
+	settings again, causing trouble when pasting text.  You might want to
+	set the 'paste' option again.
+	When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to
+	the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.
+	Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.
+	Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use
+	the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.
+
+						*'pastetoggle'* *'pt'*
+'pastetoggle' 'pt'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'
+	option.  This is like specifying a mapping: >
+	    :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>
+<	Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.
+	The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.
+	'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in
+	Command-line mode.
+	Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'.  However,
+	when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do
+	this: >
+	    :map <F10> :set paste<CR>
+	    :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>
+	    :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>
+	    :imap <F11> <nop>
+	    :set pastetoggle=<F11>
+<	This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.
+	Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste
+	mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key
+	sequence.
+
+						*'pex'* *'patchexpr'*
+'patchexpr' 'pex'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+diff|
+			feature}
+	Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
+	the resulting new version of the file.	See |diff-patchexpr|.
+
+						*'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
+'patchmode' 'pm'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept.  This can be used
+	to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
+	source distribution.  Only the first time that a file is written a
+	copy of the original file will be kept.  The name of the copy is the
+	name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
+	appended.  This option should start with a dot.  Use a string like
+	".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
+	backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
+	been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
+	backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
+	created.
+	When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
+	Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
+	end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
+	recognized as a compressed file.
+
+					*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
+'path' 'pa'		string	(default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
+				   on OS/2:	  ".,/emx/include,,"
+				   other systems: ".,,")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
+	|gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find| and other commands, provided that the file
+	being searched for has a relative path (not starting with '/').  The
+	directories in the 'path' option may be relative or absolute.
+	- Use commas to separate directory names: >
+		:set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
+<	- Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards
+	  compatibility with version 3.0).  To have a space in a directory
+	  name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: >
+		:set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
+<	- To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
+	  backslash: >
+		:set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
+<	- To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
+		:set path=.
+<	- To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
+	  commas: >
+		:set path=,,
+<	- A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
+	- Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	- When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used.  For example, adding
+	  "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
+	- Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree:
+	  1) "*" matches a sequence of characters, e.g.: >
+		:set path=/usr/include/*
+<	     means all subdirectories in /usr/include (but not /usr/include
+	     itself). >
+		:set path=/usr/*c
+<	     matches /usr/doc and /usr/src.
+	  2) "**" matches a subtree, up to 100 directories deep.  Example: >
+		:set path=/home/user_x/src/**
+<	     means search in the whole subtree under "/home/usr_x/src".
+	  3) If the path ends with a ';', this path is the startpoint
+	     for upward search.
+	  See |file-searching| for more info and exact syntax.
+	  {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
+	- Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
+		:set path=.,c:\\include
+<	  Or just use '/' instead: >
+		:set path=.,c:/include
+<	Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
+	the file!
+	The maximum length is limited.	How much depends on the system, mostly
+	it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
+	You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
+	'path', see |:checkpath|.
+	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.  To remove the current directory use: >
+		:set path-=
+<	To add the current directory use: >
+		:set path+=
+<	To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
+	separator.  Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
+	names are separated with a semi-colon: >
+		:let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
+<	Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used.  Note that
+	this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.
+
+			*'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
+'preserveindent' 'pi'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
+	indent structure as possible.  Normally the indent is replaced by a
+	series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
+	enabled, in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option
+	means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
+	for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
+	NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
+	tabs and spaces.  You might not like this.
+	NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+	Also see 'copyindent'.
+	Use |:retab| to clean up white space.
+
+					*'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
+'previewheight' 'pvh'	number (default 12)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
+			|+quickfix| feature}
+	Default height for a preview window.  Used for |:ptag| and associated
+	commands.  Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.
+
+					*'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'*
+					*'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
+'previewwindow' 'pvw'	boolean (default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
+			|+quickfix| feature}
+	Identifies the preview window.	Only one window can have this option
+	set.  It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
+	|:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.
+
+						*'printdevice'* *'pdev'*
+'printdevice' 'pdev'	string	(default empty)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
+			feature}
+	This defines the name of the printer to be used when the |:hardcopy|
+	command is issued with a bang (!) to skip the printer selection
+	dialog.  On Win32, it should be the printer name exactly as it appears
+	in the standard printer dialog.
+	If the option is empty, then vim will use the system default printer
+	for ":hardcopy!"
+
+					*'printencoding'* *'penc'* *E620*
+'printencoding' 'penc'	String	(default empty, except for:
+					Windows, OS/2: cp1252,
+					Macintosh: mac-roman,
+					VMS: dec-mcs,
+					HPUX: hp-roman8,
+					EBCDIC: ebcdic-uk)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
+			and |+postscript| features}
+	Sets the character encoding used when printing.  This option tells VIM
+	which print character encoding file from the "print" directory in
+	'runtimepath' to use.
+
+	This option will accept any value from |encoding-names|.  Any
+	recognized names are converted to VIM standard names - see 'encoding'
+	for more details.  Names not recognized by VIM will just be converted
+	to lower case and underscores replaced with '-' signs.
+
+	If 'printencoding' is empty or VIM cannot find the file then it will
+	use 'encoding' (if VIM is compiled with |+multi_byte| and it is set an
+	8-bit encoding) to find the print character encoding file.  If VIM is
+	unable to find a character encoding file then it will use the "latin1"
+	print character encoding file.
+
+	When 'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding, VIM will try to
+	convert characters to the printing encoding for printing (if
+	'printencoding' is empty then the conversion will be to latin1).
+	Conversion to a printing encoding other than latin1 will require VIM
+	to be compiled with the |+iconv| feature.  If no conversion is
+	possible then printing will fail.  Any characters that cannot be
+	converted will be replaced with upside down question marks.
+
+	Four print character encoding files are provided to support default
+	Mac, VMS, HPUX, and EBCDIC character encodings and are used by default
+	on these platforms.  Code page 1252 print character encoding is used
+	by default on Windows and OS/2 platforms.
+
+
+						*'printexpr'* *'pexpr'*
+'printexpr' 'pexpr'	String	(default: see below)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
+			and |+postscript| features}
+	Expression that is evaluated to print the PostScript produced with
+	":hardcopy".
+	The file name to be printed is in |v:fname_in|.
+	The arguments to the ":hardcopy" command are in |v:cmdarg|.
+	The expression must take care of deleting the file after printing it.
+	When there is an error, the expression must return a non-zero number.
+	If there is no error, return zero or an empty string.
+	The default for non MS-Windows or VMS systems is to simply use "lpr"
+	to print the file: >
+
+	    system('lpr' . (&printdevice == '' ? '' : ' -P' . &printdevice)
+		. ' ' . v:fname_in) . delete(v:fname_in) + v:shell_error
+<
+	On MS-Windows machines the default is to copy the file to the
+	currently specified printdevice: >
+
+	    system('copy' . ' ' . v:fname_in . ' "' . &printdevice . '"')
+			. delete(v:fname_in)
+<
+	On VMS machines the default is to send the file to either the default
+	or currently specified printdevice: >
+
+	    system('print' . (&printdevice == '' ? '' : ' /queue=' .
+			&printdevice) . ' ' . v:fname_in) . delete(v:fname_in)
+<
+	If you change this option, using a function is an easy way to avoid
+	having to escape all the spaces.  Example: >
+
+		:set printexpr=PrintFile(v:fname_in)
+		:function PrintFile(fname)
+		:  call system("ghostview " . a:fname)
+		:  call delete(a:fname)
+		:  return v:shell_error
+		:endfunc
+
+<	Be aware that some print programs return control before they have read
+	the file.  If you delete the file too soon it will not be printed.
+	These programs usually offer an option to have them remove the file
+	when printing is done.
+								*E365*
+	If evaluating the expression fails or it results in a non-zero number,
+	you get an error message.  In that case Vim will delete the
+	file.  In the default value for non-MS-Windows a trick is used: Adding
+	"v:shell_error" will result in a non-zero number when the system()
+	call fails.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'printfont'* *'pfn'* *E613*
+'printfont' 'pfn'	string	(default "courier")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
+			feature}
+	This is the name of the font that will be used for the |:hardcopy|
+	command's output.  It has the same format as the 'guifont' option,
+	except that only one font may be named, and the special "guifont=*"
+	syntax is not available.
+	In the Win32 GUI version this specifies a font name with its extra
+	attributes, as with the 'guifont' option.
+	For other systems, only ":h11" is recognized, where "11" is the point
+	size of the font.  When omitted, the point size is 10.
+
+						*'printheader'* *'pheader'*
+'printheader' 'pheader'  string  (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+printer|
+			feature}
+	This defines the format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output.
+	The option is defined in the same way as the 'statusline' option.
+	If Vim has not been compiled with the |+statusline| feature, this
+	option has no effect and a simple default header is used, which shows
+	the page number.
+
+						*'printoptions'* *'popt'*
+'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with |+printer| feature}
+	This is a comma-separated list of items that control the format of
+	the output of |:hardcopy|:
+
+	  left:{spec}		left margin (default: 10pc)
+	  right:{spec}		right margin (default: 5pc)
+	  top:{spec}		top margin (default: 5pc)
+	  bottom:{spec}		bottom margin (default: 5pc)
+				{spec} is a number followed by "in" for
+				inches, "pt" for points (1 point is 1/72 of an
+				inch), "mm" for millimeters or "pc" for a
+				percentage of the media size.
+				Weird example:
+				    left:2in,top:30pt,right:16mm,bottom:3pc
+				If the unit is not recognized there is no
+				error and the default value is used.
+
+	  header:{nr}		Number of lines to reserve for the header.
+				Only the first line is actually filled, thus
+				when {nr} is 2 there is one empty line.  The
+				header is formatted according to
+				'printheader'.
+	  header:0		Do not print a header.
+	  header:2  (default)	Use two lines for the header
+
+	  syntax:n		Do not use syntax highlighting.  This is
+				faster and thus useful when printing large
+				files.
+	  syntax:y		Do syntax highlighting.
+	  syntax:a  (default)	Use syntax highlighting if the printer appears
+				to be able to print color or grey.
+
+	  number:y		Include line numbers in the printed output.
+	  number:n  (default)	No line numbers.
+
+	  wrap:y    (default)	Wrap long lines.
+	  wrap:n		Truncate long lines.
+
+	  duplex:off		Print on one side.
+	  duplex:long (default)	Print on both sides (when possible), bind on
+				long side.
+	  duplex:short		Print on both sides (when possible), bind on
+				short side.
+
+	  collate:y  (default)	Collating: 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3
+	  collate:n		No collating: 1 1 1, 2 2 2, 3 3 3
+
+	  jobsplit:n (default)	Do all copies in one print job
+	  jobsplit:y		Do each copy as a separate print job.  Useful
+				when doing N-up postprocessing.
+
+	  portrait:y (default)	Orientation is portrait.
+	  portrait:n		Orientation is landscape.
+							*a4* *letter*
+	  paper:A4   (default)	Paper size: A4
+	  paper:{name}		Paper size from this table:
+				{name}	    size in cm	     size in inch ~
+				10x14	    25.4  x 35.57    10    x 14
+				A3	    29.7  x 42	     11.69 x 16.54
+				A4	    21	  x 29.7      8.27 x 11.69
+				A5	    14.8  x 21	      5.83 x  8.27
+				B4	    25	  x 35.3     10.12 x 14.33
+				B5	    17.6  x 25	      7.17 x 10.12
+				executive   18.42 x 26.67     7.25 x 10.5
+				folio	    21	  x 33	      8.27 x 13
+				ledger	    43.13 x 27.96    17    x 11
+				legal	    21.59 x 35.57     8.5  x 14
+				letter	    21.59 x 27.96     8.5  x 11
+				quarto	    21.59 x 27.5      8.5  x 10.83
+				statement   13.97 x 21.59     5.5  x  8.5
+				tabloid     27.96 x 43.13    11    x 17
+
+	  formfeed:n (default)	Treat form feed characters (0x0c) as a normal
+				print character.
+	  formfeed:y		When a form feed character is encountered,
+				continue printing of the current line at the
+				beginning of the first line on a new page.
+
+	The item indicated with (default) is used when the item is not
+	present.  The values are not always used, especially when using a
+	dialog to select the printer and options.
+	Example: >
+		:set printoptions=paper:letter,duplex:off
+<
+				   *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
+'readonly' 'ro'		boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+	If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'.  Protects you from
+	accidentally overwriting a file.  Default on when Vim is started
+	in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
+	{not in Vi:}  When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is
+	set for the newly edited buffer.  When using ":w!" the 'readonly'
+	option is reset for the current buffer.
+
+						*'remap'* *'noremap'*
+'remap'			boolean	(default on)
+			global
+	Allows for mappings to work recursively.  If you do not want this for
+	a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
+
+						*'report'*
+'report'		number	(default 2)
+			global
+	Threshold for reporting number of lines changed.  When the number of
+	changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
+	":" commands.  If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
+	For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
+	instead of the number of lines.
+
+			 *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'*
+'restorescreen' 'rs'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}  {only in Windows 95/NT console version}
+	When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim.  This also
+	happens when executing external commands.
+
+	For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'
+	options in your .vimrc.  To disable restoring:
+		set t_ti= t_te=
+	To enable restoring (for an xterm):
+		set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8
+	(Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)
+
+				*'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
+'revins' 'ri'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards.  See "typing
+	backwards" |ins-reverse|.  This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
+	command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.
+
+				 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
+'rightleft' 'rl'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
+	that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
+	Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
+	are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
+	This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
+	simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
+	useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
+	and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
+	in different windows).  Also see |rileft.txt|.
+
+			*'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'* *'norightleftcmd'* *'norlc'*
+'rightleftcmd' 'rlc'	string	(default "search")
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
+			feature}
+	Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
+	right-to-left mode for a group of commands:
+
+		search		"/" and "?" commands
+
+	This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
+	The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.
+
+					 *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
+'ruler' 'ru'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+cmdline_info| feature}
+	Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
+	comma.	When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
+	text in the file is shown on the far right:
+		Top	first line is visible
+		Bot	last line is visible
+		All	first and last line are visible
+		45%	relative position in the file
+	If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
+	Each window has its own ruler.	If a window has a status line, the
+	ruler is shown there.  Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the
+	screen.  If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (ie. not empty),
+	this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'
+	If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
+	bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both
+	the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
+	separated with a dash.
+	For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
+	For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
+	This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
+	If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
+	you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
+'rulerformat' 'ruf'	string	(default empty)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
+			feature}
+	When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
+	string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
+	The format of this option, is like that of 'statusline'.
+	The default ruler width is 17 characters.  To make the ruler 15
+	characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
+	Example: >
+		:set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
+<
+				*'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
+'runtimepath' 'rtp'	string	(default:
+					Unix: "$HOME/.vim,
+						$VIM/vimfiles,
+						$VIMRUNTIME,
+						$VIM/vimfiles/after,
+						$HOME/.vim/after"
+					Amiga: "home:vimfiles,
+						$VIM/vimfiles,
+						$VIMRUNTIME,
+						$VIM/vimfiles/after,
+						home:vimfiles/after"
+					PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,
+						$VIM/vimfiles,
+						$VIMRUNTIME,
+						$VIM/vimfiles/after,
+						$HOME/vimfiles/after"
+					Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,
+						$VIMRUNTIME,
+						$VIM:vimfiles:after"
+					RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,
+						$VIMRUNTIME,
+						Choices:vimfiles/after"
+					VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,
+						$VIM/vimfiles,
+						$VIMRUNTIME,
+						$VIM/vimfiles/after,
+						sys$login:vimfiles/after"
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime
+	files:
+	  filetype.vim	filetypes by file name |new-filetype|
+	  scripts.vim	filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts|
+	  colors/	color scheme files |:colorscheme|
+	  compiler/	compiler files |:compiler|
+	  doc/		documentation |write-local-help|
+	  ftplugin/	filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
+	  indent/	indent scripts |indent-expression|
+	  keymap/	key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
+	  lang/		menu translations |:menutrans|
+	  menu.vim	GUI menus |menu.vim|
+	  plugin/	plugin scripts |write-plugin|
+	  print/	files for printing |postscript-print-encoding|
+	  syntax/	syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
+	  tutor/	files for vimtutor |tutor|
+
+	And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.
+
+	The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:
+	1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.
+	2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system
+	   administrator.
+	3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.
+							*after-directory*
+	4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory.  This is
+	   for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed
+	   defaults (rarely needed)
+	5. In the "after" directory in your home directory.  This is for
+	   personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
+	   or system-wide settings (rarely needed).
+
+	Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed.  Normal
+	wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
+	runtime files.	For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
+	wildcards.
+	See |:runtime|.
+	Example: >
+		:set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
+<	This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
+	personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a
+	group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime
+	files).
+	You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the
+	distributed runtime files.  You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME
+	to find files which replace a distributed runtime files.  You can put
+	a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
+	runtime files.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'scroll'* *'scr'*
+'scroll' 'scr'		number	(default: half the window height)
+			local to window
+	Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands.  Will be
+	set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
+	changes.  If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
+	be used as the new value for 'scroll'.	Reset to half the window
+	height with ":set scroll=0".   {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives
+	the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference
+	when lines wrap}
+
+			*'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
+'scrollbind' 'scb'	boolean  (default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
+			feature}
+	See also |scroll-binding|.  When this option is set, the current
+	window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
+	this option set) scroll.  This option is useful for viewing the
+	differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
+	See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
+	interpreted.
+	This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
+	file.  This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
+	with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.
+
+						*'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
+'scrolljump' 'sj'	number	(default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
+	screen (e.g., with "j").  Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
+	CTRL-D).  Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
+	NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'scrolloff'* *'so'*
+'scrolloff' 'so'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
+	This will make some context visible around where you are working.  If
+	you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
+	in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
+	when long lines wrap).
+	For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
+	NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
+'scrollopt' 'sbo'	string	(default "ver,jump")
+			global
+			{not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
+	'scrollbind' windows should behave.
+	The following words are available:
+	    ver		Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
+	    hor		Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
+	    jump	Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
+			scrolling.  This offset is the difference in the first
+			displayed line of the bound windows.  When moving
+			around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
+			reach a position before the start or after the end of
+			the buffer.  The offset is not changed though, when
+			moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
+			to the desired position when possible.
+			When now making that window the current one, two
+			things can be done with the relative offset:
+			1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
+			   adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
+			   window.  When going back to the other window, the
+			   the new relative offset will be used.
+			2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
+			   scrolled to keep the same relative offset.  When
+			   going back to the other window, it still uses the
+			   same relative offset.
+	Also see |scroll-binding|.
+
+						*'sections'* *'sect'*
+'sections' 'sect'	string	(default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
+			global
+	Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections.  These are pairs of
+	two letters (See |object-motions|).  The default makes a section start
+	at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".
+
+						*'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523*
+'secure'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in
+	".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are
+	displayed.  Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into
+	problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off.  On Unix this option is
+	only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you.  This can be
+	dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown".	You better set
+	'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'selection'* *'sel'*
+'selection' 'sel'	string	(default "inclusive")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option defines the behavior of the selection.  It is only used
+	in Visual and Select mode.
+	Possible values:
+	   value	past line     inclusive ~
+	   old		   no		yes
+	   inclusive	   yes		yes
+	   exclusive	   yes		no
+	"past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
+	character past the line.
+	"inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
+	in an operation.  For example, when "x" is used to delete the
+	selection.
+	Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end
+	backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when
+	starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.
+
+	The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command.
+
+						*'selectmode'* *'slm'*
+'selectmode' 'slm'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start
+	Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
+	Possible values:
+	   mouse	when using the mouse
+	   key		when using shifted special keys
+	   cmd		when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
+	See |Select-mode|.
+	The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command.
+
+						*'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
+'sessionoptions' 'ssop'	string	(default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
+							help,options,winsize")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +mksession
+			feature}
+	Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command.  It is a comma
+	separated list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring
+	something:
+	   word		save and restore ~
+	   blank	empty windows
+	   buffers	hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
+	   curdir	the current directory
+	   folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
+			fold options
+	   globals	global variables that start with an uppercase letter
+			and contain at least one lowercase letter.
+	   help		the help window
+	   localoptions	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
+			global values for local options)
+	   options	all options and mappings (also global values for local
+			options)
+	   resize	size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
+	   sesdir	the directory in which the session file is located
+			will become the current directory (useful with
+			projects accessed over a network from different
+			systems)
+	   slash	backslashes in file names replaced with forward
+			slashes
+	   unix		with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
+			on Windows or DOS
+	   winpos	position of the whole Vim window
+	   winsize	window sizes
+
+	Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".
+	When "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored with
+	absolute paths.
+	"slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files
+	with Unix.  The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
+	but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
+
+						*'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
+'shell' 'sh'		string	(default $SHELL or "sh",
+					MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or
+					"cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")
+			global
+	Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands.  When changing the
+	value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
+	'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
+	It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g.	"csh -f".
+	See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
+	Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
+	it in quotes.  Example: >
+		:set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
+<	Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
+	each space (to avoid ending the option value).	Also note that the
+	"-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
+	name.  And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
+	separators.
+	For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment
+	variable to change the way external commands are executed.  See the
+	libc.inf file of DJGPP.
+	Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
+	included.  Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
+	works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
+	filtering).
+	For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is
+	changed to "C:\".  To avoid this set 'shell' like this: >
+		:set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos
+<	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
+'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'	string	(default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
+					does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
+	"bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir".  For the MS-DOS-like
+	systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
+	reduce the need to set this option by the user.  It's not used for
+	OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself).  See |option-backslash| about
+	including spaces and backslashes.  See |dos-shell|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
+'shellpipe' 'sp'	string	(default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
+			feature}
+	String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
+	error file.  See also |:make_makeprg|.	See |option-backslash| about
+	including spaces and backslashes.
+	The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
+	(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
+	of this option).
+	For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">".  The output is directly
+	saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.
+	For Unix the default it "| tee".  The stdout of the compiler is saved
+	in a file and echoed to the screen.  If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
+	"tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee".  If the
+	'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "zsh" or "bash" the default becomes
+	"2>&1| tee".  This means that stderr is also included.
+	The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
+	and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
+	there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
+	explicitly set before.
+	When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
+	":make" output will be done.  This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
+	that writes to 'makeef' by itself.  If you want no piping, but do
+	want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
+	Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
+	In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
+	become obsolete (at least for Unix).
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'shellquote'* *'shq'*
+'shellquote' 'shq'	string	(default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
+					contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
+	the "!" and ":!" commands.  The redirection is kept outside of the
+	quoting.  See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection.  It's
+	probably not useful to set both options.
+	This is an empty string by default.  Only known to be useful for
+	third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
+	or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted according
+	the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
+	user.  See |dos-shell|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'shellredir'* *'srr'*
+'shellredir' 'srr'	string	(default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
+	file.  See also |:!|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
+	and backslashes.
+	The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
+	(the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
+	of this option).
+	The default is ">".  For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"
+	or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&".  If the
+	'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes
+	">%s 2>&1".  This means that stderr is also included.
+	For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked
+	for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1".  Also, the same names with
+	".exe" appended are checked for.
+	The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
+	and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
+	there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
+	explicitly set before.
+	In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
+	become obsolete (at least for Unix).
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+			*'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
+'shellslash' 'ssl'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}
+	When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names.  This is
+	useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or
+	cmd.exe.  Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to
+	forward slashes by Vim.
+	Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
+	existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
+	any file for best results.  This might change in the future.
+	'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
+	separator.  To test if this is so use: >
+		if exists('+shellslash')
+<
+						*'shelltype'* *'st'*
+'shelltype' 'st'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi} {only for the Amiga}
+	On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work
+	which use a shell.
+	0 and 1: always use the shell
+	2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines
+	4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command
+	When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.
+
+	0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
+	1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands
+
+						*'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
+'shellxquote' 'sxq'	string	(default: "";
+					for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
+					somewhere: "\""
+					for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
+	the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
+	'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
+	to set both options.
+	This is an empty string by default.  Known to be useful for
+	third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
+	Shell or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted
+	according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
+	by the user.  See |dos-shell|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+			*'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
+'shiftround' 'sr'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'.  Applies to > and <
+	commands.  CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
+	a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
+'shiftwidth' 'sw'	number	(default 8)
+			local to buffer
+	Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent.	Used for
+	|'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.
+
+						*'shortmess'* *'shm'*
+'shortmess' 'shm'	string	(Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
+	messages, for example  with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
+	It is a list of flags:
+	 flag	meaning when present	~
+	  f	use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"
+	  i	use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"
+	  l	use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"
+	  m	use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"
+	  n	use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"
+	  r	use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"
+	  w	use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message
+		and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
+	  x	use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of
+		"[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".
+	  a	all of the above abbreviations
+
+	  o	overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message
+		for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)
+	  O	message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.
+		Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").
+	  s	don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search
+		hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages
+	  t	truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit
+		on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.
+		Ignored in Ex mode.
+	  T	truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to
+		fit on the command line. "..." will appear in the middle.
+		Ignored in Ex mode.
+	  W	don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file
+	  A	don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
+		is found.
+	  I	don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.
+
+	This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
+	requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
+	possible for the space available.  To get the whole message that you
+	would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
+	Useful values:
+	    shm=	No abbreviation of message.
+	    shm=a	Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
+	    shm=at	Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.
+
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+				 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'*
+'shortname' 'sn'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions}
+	Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3
+	characters.  Multiple dots in file names are not allowed.  When this
+	option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when
+	adding an extension (".~" or ".swp").  This option is not available
+	for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on.  This option is useful
+	when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos
+	or crossdos.  When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this
+	option is always on by default.
+
+						*'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
+'showbreak' 'sbr'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the  |+linebreak|
+			feature}
+	String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped.  Useful
+	values are "> " or "+++ ".
+	Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
+	comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
+	part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
+	The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in
+	'highlight'.
+	Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
+	If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
+	"n" flag to 'cpoptions'.
+
+				     *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
+'showcmd' 'sc'		boolean	(Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
+				 off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+cmdline_info| feature}
+	Show (partial) command in status line.	Set this option off if your
+	terminal is slow.
+	In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
+	- When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
+	- When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
+	- When selecting a block, the size in screen characters: linesxcolumns.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+			*'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
+'showfulltag' 'sft'	boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
+	tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
+	pattern (if there is one) as possible matches.	Thus, if you have
+	matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
+	required (coding style permitting).
+
+				 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
+'showmatch' 'sm'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+	When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one.  The
+	jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen.  The time to
+	show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
+	A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
+	seen or not).  This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
+	When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
+	will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
+	See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
+	blinking when showing the match.
+	The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
+	matches for.  'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
+	matches.
+	Note: For the use of the short form parental guidance is advised.
+
+				 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
+'showmode' 'smd'	boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
+			global
+	If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
+	Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for
+	this message.
+	When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM".	But this
+	doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is
+	not set.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
+'sidescroll' 'ss'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally.  Used only when
+	the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
+	When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
+	When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0.  When using
+	a fast terminal use a small number or 1.  Not used for "zh" and "zl"
+	commands.
+
+						*'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
+'sidescrolloff' 'siso'	number (default 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
+	right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set. Setting this option to a value
+	greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero value
+	makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
+	horizontally (except at the end and beginning of the line).  Setting
+	this option to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the
+	cursor horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not
+	come too close to the beginning or end of the line.
+	NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
+
+	Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
+		 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
+		 onto the "extends" character:
+
+		 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
+		 :set sidescrolloff=1
+
+
+			*'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
+'smartcase' 'scs'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
+	case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
+	'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
+	":g" and ":s".	Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc..	After
+	"*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
+	recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+			     *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
+'smartindent' 'si'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+smartindent| feature}
+	Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line.  Works for C-like
+	programs, but can also be used for other languages.  'cindent' does
+	something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
+	see |C-indenting|.  When 'cindent' is on, setting 'si' has no effect.
+	'indentexpr' is a more advanced alternative.
+	Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
+	An indent is automatically inserted:
+	- After a line ending in '{'.
+	- After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
+	- Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).
+	When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
+	given the same indent as the matching '{'.
+	When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
+	that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column.  The indent
+	is restored for the next line.	If you don't want this, use this
+	mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
+	When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
+	right.
+	NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.	When 'paste'
+	is set smart indenting is disabled.
+
+				 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
+'smarttab' 'sta'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
+	'shiftwidth'.  'tabstop' is used in other places.  A <BS> will delete
+	a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the line.
+	When off a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop'.
+	'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or right
+	|shift-left-right|.
+	What gets inserted (a Tab or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
+	option.  Also see |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the
+	number of spaces minimized by using <Tab>s.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+					*'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
+'softtabstop' 'sts'	number	(default 0)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
+	operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>.  It "feels" like
+	<Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
+	used.  This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
+	of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'.  However,
+	commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
+	When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
+	'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
+	See also |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
+	spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
+	The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
+	set.
+	NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
+
+			*'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
+'splitbelow' 'sb'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			feature}
+	When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
+	one. |:split|
+
+			*'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
+'splitright' 'spr'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			feature}
+	When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
+	current one. |:vsplit|
+
+			   *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
+'startofline' 'sol'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
+	blank of the line.  When off the cursor is kept in the same column
+	(if possible).	This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,
+	CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", , and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"
+	with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing
+	commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.).  Also for an Ex command that
+	only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
+	In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
+	where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
+	NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.
+
+			   *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542*
+'statusline' 'stl'	string	(default empty)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
+			feature}
+	When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.
+	Also see |status-line|.
+
+	The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
+	normal text.  Each status line item is of the form:
+	  %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
+	All fields except the {item} is optional.  A single percent sign can
+	be given as "%%".  Up to 80 items can be specified.
+
+	Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
+	'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.
+
+	field	    meaning ~
+	-	    Left justify the item. The default is right justified
+		    when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
+	0	    Leading zeroes in numeric items. Overridden by '-'.
+	minwid	    Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.
+		    Value must be 50 or less.
+	maxwid	    Maximum width of the item.	Truncation occurs with a '<'
+		    on the left for text items.  Numeric items will be
+		    shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number
+		    where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
+		    an exponential notation.
+	item	    A one letter code as described below.
+
+	Following is a description of the possible statusline items.  The
+	second character in "item" is the type:
+		N for number
+		S for string
+		F for flags as described below
+		- not applicable
+
+	item  meaning ~
+	f S   Path to the file in the buffer, relative to current directory.
+	F S   Full path to the file in the buffer.
+	t S   File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
+	m F   Modified flag, text is " [+]"; " [-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
+	M F   Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
+	r F   Readonly flag, text is " [RO]".
+	R F   Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
+	h F   Help buffer flag, text is " [help]".
+	H F   Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
+	w F   Preview window flag, text is " [Preview]".
+	W F   Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
+	y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., " [vim]".  See 'filetype'.
+	Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
+	      {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
+	k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
+	      being used: "<keymap>"
+	n N   Buffer number.
+	b N   Value of byte under cursor.
+	B N   As above, in hexadecimal.
+	o N   Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
+	      Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
+	      {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature}
+	O N   As above, in hexadecimal.
+	N N   Printer page number. (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)
+	l N   Line number.
+	L N   Number of lines in buffer.
+	c N   Column number.
+	v N   Virtual column number.
+	V N   Virtual column number as -{num}.	Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
+	p N   Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
+	P S   Percentage through file of displayed window.  This is like the
+	      percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length.
+	a S   Argument list status as in default title. ({current} of {max})
+	      Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
+	{ NF  Evaluate expression between '{' and '}' and substitute result.
+	( -   Start of item group.  Can be used for setting the width and
+	      alignment of a section.  Must be followed by %) somewhere.
+	) -   End of item group.  No width fields allowed.
+	< -   Where to truncate line if too long.  Default is at the start.
+	      No width fields allowed.
+	= -   Separation point between left and right aligned items.
+	      No width fields allowed.
+	* -   Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
+	      minwid field. eg. %1*.  Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
+	      The difference between User{N} and StatusLine  will be applied
+	      to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
+	      The number N must be between 1 and 9.  See |hl-User1..9|
+
+	Display of flags are controlled by the following heuristic:
+	If a flag text starts with comma it is assumed that it wants to
+	separate itself from anything but preceding plaintext.	If it starts
+	with a space it is assumed that it wants to separate itself from
+	anything but other flags.  That is: A leading comma is removed if the
+	preceding character stems from plaintext.  A leading space is removed
+	if the preceding character stems from another active flag. This will
+	make a nice display when flags are used like in the examples below.
+
+	When all items in a group becomes an empty string (ie. flags that are
+	not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
+	become empty.  This will make a group like the following disappear
+	completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
+		:set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
+<
+	Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
+	line is displayed.  The current buffer and current window will be set
+	temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
+	currently being drawn. The expression will evaluate in this context.
+	The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
+	real current buffer.  The expression is evaluated in the |sandbox|.
+
+	If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
+	a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
+	setting an option without changing its value.  Example: >
+		:let &ro = &ro
+
+<	A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
+	Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
+	described above.
+
+	Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable !
+	If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
+	edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.
+
+	Examples:
+	Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
+	  :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
+<	Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
+	  :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
+<	Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
+	  :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
+	  :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
+<	Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
+	  :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
+<	In the |:autocmd|'s: >
+	  :let b:gzflag = 1
+<	And: >
+	  :unlet b:gzflag
+<	And define this function: >
+	  :function VarExists(var, val)
+	  :    if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
+	  :endfunction
+<
+						*'suffixes'* *'su'*
+'suffixes' 'su'		string	(default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
+	match a wildcard.  See |suffixes|.  Commas can be used to separate the
+	suffixes.  Spaces after the comma are ignored.	A dot is also seen as
+	the start of a suffix.	To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
+	separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
+	including spaces and backslashes).
+	See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
+	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	suffixes from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.
+
+						*'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
+'suffixesadd' 'sua'	string	(default "")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+file_in_path| feature}
+	Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
+	file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands.  Example: >
+		:set suffixesadd=.java
+<
+				*'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
+'swapfile' 'swf'	boolean (default on)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Use a swapfile for the buffer.	This option can be reset when a
+	swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer.  For example, with
+	confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
+	Careful: All text will be in memory:
+		- Don't use this for big files.
+		- Recovery will be impossible!
+	A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
+	'swapfile' is set.
+	When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
+	immediately deleted.  When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
+	non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
+	Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.
+
+	This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
+	specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
+
+						*'swapsync'* *'sws'*
+'swapsync' 'sws'	string	(default "fsync")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after
+	writing to it.	This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.
+	When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and
+	not written to disk.  When the system crashes you may lose more work.
+	On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,
+	so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small.  On some
+	systems the swap file will not be written at all.  For a unix system
+	setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
+	fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
+
+						*'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
+'switchbuf' 'swb'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
+	Possible values (comma separated list):
+	   useopen	If included, jump to the first open window that
+			contains the specified buffer (if there is one).
+			Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.
+			This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when
+			jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.).  It is
+			also used in all buffer related split commands, for
+			example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
+	   split	If included, split the current window before loading
+			a buffer. Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
+			Supported in |quickfix| commands that display errors.
+
+						*'syntax'* *'syn'*
+'syntax' 'syn'		string	(default empty)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
+			feature}
+	When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
+	syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
+	Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
+	b:current_syntax variable does).
+	This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
+	not automatically recognized.  Example, for in an IDL file: >
+		/* vim: set syntax=idl : */
+<	To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
+		:set syntax=OFF
+<	To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
+	'filetype' option: >
+		:set syntax=ON
+<	What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
+	Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
+	This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
+	'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
+
+					*'tabstop'* *'ts'*
+'tabstop' 'ts'		number	(default 8)
+			local to buffer
+	Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for.  Also see
+	|:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option.
+
+	Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
+	appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).
+
+	There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
+	1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
+	   (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'.  Then Vim
+	   will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing Tab and BS will
+	   behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
+	2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
+	   'expandtab'.  This way you will always insert spaces.  The
+	   formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
+	3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
+	   |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again.	Only
+	   works when using Vim to edit the file.
+	4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
+	   'noexpandtab'.  This should then work (for initial indents only)
+	   for any tabstop setting that people use.  It might be nice to have
+	   tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
+	   though.  Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
+	   changed.
+
+			*'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
+'tagbsearch' 'tbs'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
+	use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file.	Binary
+	searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
+	will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
+	Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
+	they are not sorted.  Only when this is not the case does the
+	'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.
+
+	When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
+	files.	In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
+	certain files, or retry all files with a linear search.  When
+	'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.
+
+	Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
+	at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
+   !_TAG_FILE_SORTED	0	/some command/
+<	[The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]
+
+	When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
+	files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
+	instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
+	Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
+	be found in the retry.
+
+	If a tag file indicates that is is case-fold sorted, the second,
+	linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case.  Use a value
+	of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be
+	case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
+	the command: "sort -f -o tags tags".  For "Exuberant ctags" version
+	5.3 or higher the -f or --fold-case-sort switch can be used for this
+	as well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this to work.
+
+	When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
+	exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
+	files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
+	When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
+	ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
+	must be included in the tags file.
+	This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
+	command-line completion and ":help").
+	{Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}
+
+						*'taglength'* *'tl'*
+'taglength' 'tl'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+	If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.
+
+			*'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
+'tagrelative' 'tr'	boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	If on and using a tag file in another directory, file names in that
+	tag file are relative to the directory where the tag file is.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
+'tags' 'tag'		string	(default "./tags,tags", when compiled with
+				|+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+	Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas.  To
+	include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash
+	(see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes).
+	When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
+	of the current file.  But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
+	'cpoptions'.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  Also see
+	|tags-option|.
+	"*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
+	a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  {not available when compiled
+	without the |+path_extra| feature}
+	If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
+	files are also supported.  They are automatically recognized.  The
+	default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case
+	differences are ignored (MS-Windows).  |emacs-tags|
+	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	file names from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.
+	{Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}
+
+				*'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
+'tagstack' 'tgst'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in all versions of Vi}
+	When on, the |tagstack| is used normally.  When off, a ":tag" or
+	":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
+	tagstack.  A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
+	any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
+	tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
+	Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
+	mapping which should not change the tagstack.
+
+						*'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
+'term'			string	(default is $TERM, if that fails:
+				      in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
+					on Amiga: "amiga"
+					 on BeOS: "beos-ansi"
+					  on Mac: "mac-ansi"
+					 on MiNT: "vt52"
+				       on MS-DOS: "pcterm"
+					 on OS/2: "os2ansi"
+					 on Unix: "ansi"
+					  on VMS: "ansi"
+				       on Win 32: "win32")
+			global
+	Name of the terminal.  Used for choosing the terminal control
+	characters.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
+	For example: >
+		:set term=$TERM
+<	See |termcap|.
+
+						*'termbidi'* *'tbidi'*
+						*'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
+'termbidi' 'tbidi'	boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
+			feature}
+	The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
+	by Unicode).  The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
+	that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
+	Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
+	'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
+	Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
+	'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
+	This option is reset when the GUI is started.
+	For further details see |arabic.txt|.
+
+					*'termencoding'* *'tenc'*
+'termencoding' 'tenc'	string	(default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with
+						    Macintosh GUI: "macroman")
+			global
+			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
+			feature}
+			{not in Vi}
+	Encoding used for the terminal.  This specifies what character
+	encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand.  For
+	the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
+	display).
+	In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
+	when it differs from the ANSI codepage.
+								*E617*
+	Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI.  After the GUI has been
+	successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
+	Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
+	message is shown.
+	For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,
+	because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.
+	When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
+	This is the normal value.
+	Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid.  See
+	|encoding-table|.
+	The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or
+	iconv().  When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you
+	will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.
+	Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and
+	want to edit a UTF-8 file: >
+		:let &termencoding = &encoding
+		:set encoding=utf-8
+<	You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.
+
+						*'terse'* *'noterse'*
+'terse'			boolean	(default off)
+			global
+	When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message
+	for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being
+	displayed).  When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option.  {Vi
+	shortens a lot of messages}
+
+				   *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'*
+'textauto' 'ta'		boolean	(Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option is obsolete.  Use 'fileformats'.
+	For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is
+	set to the default value for the current system.  When 'textauto' is
+	reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+				   *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'*
+'textmode' 'tx'		boolean	(MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,
+				 others: default off)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option is obsolete.  Use 'fileformat'.
+	For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is
+	set to "dos".  When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to
+	"unix".
+
+						*'textwidth'* *'tw'*
+'textwidth' 'tw'	number	(default 0)
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	Maximum width of text that is being inserted.  A longer line will be
+	broken after white space to get this width.  A zero value disables
+	this.  'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.	When
+	'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.	See also
+	'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
+	NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
+'thesaurus' 'tsr'	string	(default "")
+			global or local to buffer |global-local|
+			{not in Vi}
+	List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
+	for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.	Each line in
+	the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
+	non-keyword characters (white space is preferred).  Maximum line
+	length is 510 bytes.
+	To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
+	http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
+	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.	Spaces
+	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
+	name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
+	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.
+	Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.
+
+			     *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
+'tildeop' 'top'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
+	NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+				*'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
+'timeout' 'to'		boolean (default on)
+			global
+						*'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
+'ttimeout'		boolean (default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	These two options together determine the behavior when part of a
+	mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:
+
+	'timeout'    'ttimeout'		action	~
+	   off		off		do not time out
+	   on		on or off	time out on :mappings and key codes
+	   off		on		time out on key codes
+
+	If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete
+	mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there
+	is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters.  For
+	example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next
+	character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.
+	When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for
+	the next character to arrive.  After that the already received
+	characters are interpreted as single characters.  The waiting time can
+	be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.
+	On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause
+	malfunctioning cursor keys.  If both options are off, Vim waits
+	forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start
+	with <Esc>.  You will have to type <Esc> twice.  If you do not have
+	problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key
+	sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and
+	reset the 'timeout' option.
+
+	NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
+
+						*'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
+'timeoutlen' 'tm'	number	(default 1000)
+			global
+			{not in all versions of Vi}
+						*'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
+'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm'	number	(default -1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key
+	sequence to complete.  Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G
+	when part of a command has been typed.
+	Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1.  When a
+	different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to
+	a non-negative number.
+
+		ttimeoutlen	mapping delay	   key code delay	~
+		   < 0		'timeoutlen'	   'timeoutlen'
+		  >= 0		'timeoutlen'	   'ttimeoutlen'
+
+	The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options
+	tell so.  A useful setting would be >
+		:set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100
+<	(time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after
+	a tenth of a second).
+
+						*'title'* *'notitle'*
+'title'			boolean	(default off, on when title can be restored)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+title|
+			feature}
+	When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
+	'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
+		filename [+=-] (path) - VIM
+	Where:
+		filename	the name of the file being edited
+		-		indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
+		+		indicates the file was modified
+		=		indicates the file is read-only
+		=+		indicates the file is read-only and modified
+		(path)		is the path of the file being edited
+		- VIM		the server name |v:servername| or "VIM"
+	Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles
+	(currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and
+	terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and
+	iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).
+								*X11*
+	When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
+	be restored if possible.  The output of ":version" will include "+X11"
+	when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11".  This also
+	works for the icon name |'icon'|.
+	But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title
+	will not work (except in the GUI).
+	If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.
+	You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.
+	When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:
+	    rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &
+	then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the
+	title of the window should change back to what it should be after
+	exiting Vim.
+
+								*'titlelen'*
+'titlelen'		number	(default 85)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+title|
+			feature}
+	Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
+	title.	When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
+	shown.	A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
+	Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window.  But
+	it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
+	available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
+	bar.  When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used.  Otherwise,
+	values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
+	'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.
+
+						*'titleold'*
+'titleold'		string	(default "Thanks for flying Vim")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only available when compiled with the |+title|
+			feature}
+	This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
+	original title cannot be restored.  Only happens if 'title' is on or
+	'titlestring' is not empty.
+						*'titlestring'*
+'titlestring'		string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+title|
+			feature}
+	When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
+	window.  This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
+	Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently
+	Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a
+	non-empty 't_ts' option).
+	When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
+	be restored if possible |X11|.
+	When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
+	expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
+	Example: >
+    :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")
+    :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
+<	The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
+	of the available space.
+	Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
+    :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
+<	Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
+	without the file name.	The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
+	separating space only when needed.
+	NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
+	to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
+	{not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}
+
+				*'toolbar'* *'tb'*
+'toolbar' 'tb'		string	(default "icons,tooltips")
+			global
+			{only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and
+			|+GUI_Photon|}
+	The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings.	The
+	possible values are:
+		icons		Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.
+		text		Toolbar buttons shown with text.
+		horiz		Icon and text of a toolbar button are
+				horizontally arranged.	{only in GTK+ 2 GUI}
+		tooltips	Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.
+	Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse
+	cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.
+
+	If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the
+	following: >
+		:set tb=icons,text
+<	Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time.  They
+	will show icons if both are requested.
+
+	If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if
+	'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored.  If you want to disable
+	the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option.  For example: >
+		:set guioptions-=T
+<	Also see |gui-toolbar|.
+
+						*'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'*
+'toolbariconsize' 'tbis'	string	(default "small")
+				global
+				{not in Vi}
+				{only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
+	Controls the size of toolbar icons.  The possible values are:
+		tiny		Use tiny toolbar icons.
+		small		Use small toolbar icons (default).
+		medium		Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
+		large		Use large toolbar icons.
+	The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
+	the current theme.  Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
+	small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.
+
+	If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
+	by user preferences or the current theme is used.
+
+			     *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'*
+'ttybuiltin' 'tbi'	boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.
+	When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.
+	When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for
+	the change to take effect, for example: >
+		:set notbi term=$TERM
+<	See also |termcap|.
+	Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin
+	termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty
+	xterm entries...).
+
+				     *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'*
+'ttyfast' 'tf'		boolean	(default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,
+					sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or
+					iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in
+					a DOS console)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Indicates a fast terminal connection.  More characters will be sent to
+	the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line
+	commands.  Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple
+	windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.
+	Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen
+	line for lines that wrap.  This helps when using copy/paste with the
+	mouse in an xterm and other terminals.
+
+						*'ttymouse'* *'ttym'*
+'ttymouse' 'ttym'	string	(default depends on 'term')
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not
+			available when compiled without |+mouse|}
+	Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.
+	Currently these three strings are valid:
+							*xterm-mouse*
+	   xterm	xterm-like mouse handling.  The mouse generates
+			"<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:
+				"s"  = button state
+				"c"  = column plus 33
+				"r"  = row plus 33
+	   xterm2	Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
+			mouse position while the mouse is dragged.  This works
+			much faster and more precise.  Your xterm must at
+			least at patchlevel 88	/ XFree 3.3.3 for this to
+			work.  See below for how Vim detects this
+			automatically.
+							*netterm-mouse*
+	   netterm	NetTerm mouse handling.  The mouse generates
+			"<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers
+			for the row and column.
+							*dec-mouse*
+	   dec		DEC terminal mouse handling.  The mouse generates a
+			rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".
+							*jsbterm-mouse*
+	   jsbterm	JSB term mouse handling.
+							*pterm-mouse*
+	   pterm	QNX pterm mouse handling.
+
+	The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
+	|+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
+	Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized.  NetTerm mouse codes are always
+	recognized, if enabled at compile time.  DEC terminal mouse codes
+	are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
+	"xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
+	This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
+	set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
+	or "xterm2" already.  The main use of this option is to set it to
+	"xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
+	handle xterm mouse codes.
+	The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
+	95 of higher.  This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
+	feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
+	xterm version number.  Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
+	If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
+	t_RV to an empty string: >
+		:set t_RV=
+<
+						*'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*
+'ttyscroll' 'tsl'	number	(default 999)
+			global
+	Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen.  If there are more lines
+	to scroll the window is redrawn.  For terminals where scrolling is
+	very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,
+	e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.
+
+						*'ttytype'* *'tty'*
+'ttytype' 'tty'		string	(default from $TERM)
+			global
+	Alias for 'term', see above.
+
+						*'undolevels'* *'ul'*
+'undolevels' 'ul'	number	(default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
+						Win32 and OS/2)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Maximum number of changes that can be undone.  Since undo information
+	is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used
+	(nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).
+	Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
+	itself: >
+		set ul=0
+<	But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
+	'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
+	Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
+		set ul=-1
+<	This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
+	Also see |undo-two-ways|.
+
+						*'updatecount'* *'uc'*
+'updatecount' 'uc'	number	(default: 200)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
+	disk.  When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
+	recovery |crash-recovery|).  'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
+	Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|.  When editing in readonly
+	mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
+	The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
+	When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
+	created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set.  When 'updatecount'
+	is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
+	Also see |'swapsync'|.
+	This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
+	or "nowrite".
+
+						*'updatetime'* *'ut'*
+'updatetime' 'ut'	number	(default 4000)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
+	written to disk (see |crash-recovery|).  Also used for the
+	|CursorHold| autocommand event.
+
+						*'verbose'* *'vbs'*
+'verbose' 'vbs'		number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean
+			verbose option}
+	When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.
+	Currently, these messages are given:
+	>= 1	When the viminfo file is read or written.
+	>= 2	When a file is ":source"'ed.
+	>= 5	Every searched tags file.
+	>= 8	Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
+	>= 9	Every executed autocommand.
+	>= 12	Every executed function.
+	>= 13	When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
+	>= 14	Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
+	>= 15	Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).
+
+	This option can also be set with the "-V" argument.  See |-V|.
+	This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.
+
+						*'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
+'viewdir' 'vdir'	string	(default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
+							 "$VIM/vimfiles/view",
+				 for Unix: "~/.vim/view",
+				 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"
+				 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"
+				 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +mksession
+			feature}
+	Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+						*'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
+'viewoptions' 'vop'	string	(default: "folds,options,cursor")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +mksession
+			feature}
+	Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command.  It is a comma separated
+	list of words.	Each word enables saving and restoring something:
+	   word		save and restore ~
+	   cursor	cursor position in file and in window
+	   folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
+			fold options
+	   options	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
+			global values for local options)
+	   slash	backslashes in file names replaced with forward
+			slashes
+	   unix		with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
+			on Windows or DOS
+
+	"slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
+	with Unix.  The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
+	but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.
+
+				*'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
+'viminfo' 'vi'		string	(Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,
+				   Windows and OS/2: '20,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:,
+				   for Amiga: '20,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:
+				   for others: '20,<50,s10,h)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the  |+viminfo|
+			feature}
+	When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
+	when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|).	The string should be a comma
+	separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
+	identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
+	which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
+	character is left out, then the default value is used for that
+	parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
+	the effect of their value.
+	CHAR	VALUE	~
+	!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
+		with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
+		letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
+		and "_K_L_M" are not.
+	"	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
+		the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
+		backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
+		start of a comment!
+	%	When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
+		started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
+		restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
+		buffer list is restored from the viminfo file.	Buffers
+		without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
+		to the viminfo file.
+	'	Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
+		are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
+		'viminfo' is non-empty.
+		Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
+		|changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
+	/	Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
+		saved.	If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
+		patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
+		'history' is used.
+	:	Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
+		saved.	When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+	<	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
+		registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
+		saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
+		Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
+	@	Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
+		saved.	When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
+	c	When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
+		'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
+		'encoding'. See |viminfo-encoding|.
+	f	Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
+		to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
+		non-zero, they are all stored.	'0 is used for the current
+		cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
+	h	Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
+		file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
+		has been used since the last search command.
+	n	Name of the viminfo file.  The name must immediately follow
+		the 'n'.  Must be the last one!  If the "-i" argument was
+		given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
+		given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are expanded
+		when opening the file, not when setting the option.
+	r	Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
+		',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
+		specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
+		stored.  This is to avoid removable media.  For MS-DOS you
+		could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:".  You can
+		also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is
+		ignored.  Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
+		characters.
+	s	Maximum size of an item in Kbyte.  If zero then registers are
+		not saved.  Currently only applies to registers.  The default
+		"s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
+		Also see the '<' item above: line count limit.
+
+	Example: >
+	    :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo
+<
+	'50		Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
+			edited.
+	<1000		Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
+			remembered.
+	s100		Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped.
+	:0		Command-line history will not be saved.
+	n~/vim/viminfo	The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".
+	no /		Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
+			that is, save all of the search history, and also the
+			previous search and substitute patterns.
+	no %		The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
+	no h		'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.
+
+	When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to
+	load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.
+
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
+
+					    *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
+'virtualedit' 've'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the
+			|+virtualedit| feature}
+	A comma separated list of these words:
+	    block	Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
+	    insert	Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
+	    all		Allow virtual editing in all modes.
+	Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
+	no actual character.  This can be halfway into a Tab or beyond the end
+	of the line.  Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
+	editing a table.
+
+			*'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
+'visualbell' 'vb'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Use visual bell instead of beeping.  The terminal code to display the
+	visual bell is given with 't_vb'.  When no beep or flash is wanted,
+	use ":set vb t_vb=".
+	Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value.  You
+	might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
+	In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
+	for 20 msec.  If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
+	where 40 is the time in msec.
+	Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
+	Also see 'errorbells'.
+
+						*'warn'* *'nowarn'*
+'warn'			boolean	(default on)
+			global
+	Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
+	has been changed.
+
+		     *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'*
+'weirdinvert' 'wiv'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' termcap option.
+	It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.
+	Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and
+	vice versa.  Has no effect when the GUI is running.
+
+						*'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
+'whichwrap' 'ww'	string	(Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
+	previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
+	the line.  Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
+		char   key	  mode	~
+		 b    <BS>	 Normal and Visual
+		 s    <Space>	 Normal and Visual
+		 h    "h"	 Normal and Visual
+		 l    "l"	 Normal and Visual
+		 <    <Left>	 Normal and Visual
+		 >    <Right>	 Normal and Visual
+		 ~    "~"	 Normal
+		 [    <Left>	 Insert and Replace
+		 ]    <Right>	 Insert and Replace
+	For example: >
+		:set ww=<,>,[,]
+<	allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
+	When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
+	operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character.  This makes "3h"
+	different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line.  This
+	is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
+	"dh".  If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
+	":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
+	cursor.
+	When 'l' is included, you get a side effect: "yl" on an empty line
+	will include the <EOL>, so that "p" will insert a new line.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'wildchar'* *'wc'*
+'wildchar' 'wc'		number	(Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
+	command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
+	The character is not recognized when used inside a macro.  See
+	'wildcharm' for that.
+	Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
+		:set wc=<Esc>
+<	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
+	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
+
+						*'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
+'wildcharm' 'wcm'	number	(default: none (0))
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
+	recognized when used inside a macro. You can find "spare" command-line
+	keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|. Normally
+	you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
+	automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
+		:set wcm=<C-Z>
+		:cmap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
+<	Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.
+
+						*'wildignore'* *'wig'*
+'wildignore' 'wig'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
+			feature}
+	A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
+	patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names.
+	The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
+	Also see 'suffixes'.
+	Example: >
+		:set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
+<	The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
+	a pattern from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
+	uses another default.
+
+				*'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
+'wildmenu' 'wmnu'	boolean	(default off)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
+			feature}
+	When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
+	mode.  On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
+	the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the
+	first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is
+	one).  Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
+	CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
+	When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
+	specified.  "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
+	If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
+	the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left.  The status line scrolls
+	as needed.
+	The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used
+	for selecting a completion.
+	While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special
+	meanings:
+
+	<Left> <Right>	- select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
+	<Down>		- in filename/menu name completion: move into a
+			  subdirectory or submenu.
+	<CR>		- in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
+			  dot: move into a submenu.
+	<Up>		- in filename/menu name completion: move up into
+			  parent directory or parent menu.
+
+	This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|.
+
+	If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead
+	of selecting a different match, use this: >
+		:cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
+		:cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
+<
+	The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match
+	|hl-WildMenu|.
+
+						*'wildmode'* *'wim'*
+'wildmode' 'wim'	string	(Vim default: "full")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
+	'wildchar'.  It is a comma separated list of up to four parts.	Each
+	part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar.  The
+	first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
+	The second part for the second use, etc.
+	These are the possible values for each part:
+	""		Complete only the first match.
+	"full"		Complete the next full match.  After the last match,
+			the original string is used and then the first match
+			again.
+	"longest"	Complete till longest common string.  If this doesn't
+			result in a longer string, use the next part.
+	"longest:full"	Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
+			enabled.
+	"list"		When more than one match, list all matches.
+	"list:full"	When more than one match, list all matches and
+			complete first match.
+	"list:longest"	When more than one match, list all matches and
+			complete till longest common string.
+	When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.
+
+	Examples: >
+		:set wildmode=full
+<	Complete first full match, next match, etc. (the default) >
+		:set wildmode=longest,full
+<	Complete longest common string, then each full match >
+		:set wildmode=list:full
+<	List all matches and complete each full match >
+		:set wildmode=list,full
+<	List all matches without completing, then each full match >
+		:set wildmode=longest,list
+<	Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
+
+						*'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
+'winaltkeys' 'wak'	string	(default "menu")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}
+	Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
+	key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
+	menu.  This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
+	entering special characters.  This option tells what to do:
+	  no	Don't use ALT keys for menus.  ALT key combinations can be
+		mapped, but there is no automatic handling.  This can then be
+		done with the |:simalt| command.
+	  yes	ALT key handling is done by the windowing system.  ALT key
+		combinations cannot be mapped.
+	  menu	Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
+		shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system.	Other
+		keys can be mapped.
+	If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
+	key is never used for the menu.
+	In the Win32 version, the <F10> key is handled like this too, since
+	Windows uses it to select a menu.
+
+						*'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
+'winheight' 'wh'	number	(default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			feature}
+	Minimal number of lines for the current window.  This is not a hard
+	minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room.	If the
+	current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of the
+	height of other windows.  Set it to 999 to make the current window
+	always fill the screen (although this has the drawback that ":all"
+	will create only two windows).  Set it to a small number for normal
+	editing.
+	Minimum value is 1.
+	The height is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
+	height of the current window.
+	'winheight' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminheight' to set
+	the minimal height for other windows.
+
+			*'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'*
+'winfixheight' 'wfh'	boolean	(default off)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			feature}
+	Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
+	'equalalways' is set.  Set by default for the |preview-window| and
+	|quickfix-window|.
+	The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.
+
+						*'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
+'winminheight' 'wmh'	number	(default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +windows
+			feature}
+	The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
+	This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
+	When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
+	status bar) if necessary.  They will return to at least one line when
+	they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
+	Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
+	This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
+	large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
+	windows.  A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.
+
+						*'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
+'winminwidth' 'wmw'	number	(default 1)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			feature}
+	The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
+	This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
+	When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
+	a vertical separator) if necessary.  They will return to at least one
+	line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
+	to go.)
+	Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
+	This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
+	large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
+	windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.
+
+						*'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
+'winwidth' 'wiw'	number	(default 20)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the +vertsplit
+			feature}
+	Minimal number of columns for the current window.  This is not a hard
+	minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room.  If
+	the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
+	the width of other windows.  Set it to 999 to make the current window
+	always fill the screen.  Set it to a small number for normal editing.
+	The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
+	width of the current window.
+	'winwidth' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminwidth' to set
+	the minimal width for other windows.
+
+						*'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
+'wrap'			boolean	(default on)
+			local to window
+			{not in Vi}
+	This option changes how text is displayed.  It doesn't change the text
+	in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
+	When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
+	displaying continues on the next line.	When off lines will not wrap
+	and only part of long lines will be displayed.	When the cursor is
+	moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
+	horizontally.
+	The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary.  See
+	'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
+	To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
+		:set sidescroll=5
+		:set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
+<	See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
+
+						*'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
+'wrapmargin' 'wm'	number	(default 0)
+			local to buffer
+	Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
+	starts.  When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
+	and inserting continues on the next line.
+	Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
+	the text width to be further reduced.  This is Vi compatible.
+	When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
+	See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.  {Vi: works differently
+	and less usefully}
+
+				   *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'*
+'wrapscan' 'ws'		boolean	(default on)			*E384* *E385*
+			global
+	Searches wrap around the end of the file.
+
+						   *'write'* *'nowrite'*
+'write'			boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Allows writing files.  When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
+	Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
+	still allowed.	Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
+	argument.  Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
+	writing a temporary file.
+
+				   *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
+'writeany' 'wa'		boolean	(default off)
+			global
+	Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.
+
+			     *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
+'writebackup' 'wb'	boolean	(default on with |+writebackup| feature, off
+					otherwise)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
+	the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
+	also on.  Reset this option if your file system is almost full.  See
+	|backup-table| for another explanation.
+	When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
+	NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
+	set.
+
+						*'writedelay'* *'wd'*
+'writedelay' 'wd'	number	(default 0)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
+	screen.  When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
+	one.  For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work.  For debugging purposes.
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: